248
2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com. Contents Owner's Identification Form Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety .......................................................................................................................... ii Your Vehicle at a Glance ...............................................................................................................................2 Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................5 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................45 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features.........................................................................................................81 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving .............................................................................................................................................123 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving ...........................................................................................................................................................135 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................159 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer. Taking Care of the Unexpected...............................................................................................................195 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information ...............................................................................................................................215 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ......................................................................229 A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us. Index ................................................................................................................................................................. I Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

  • Upload
    dotram

  • View
    223

  • Download
    2

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Owner's Identification Form

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... i

A Few Words About Safety .......................................................................................................................... ii

Your Vehicle at a Glance ...............................................................................................................................2

Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................5 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.

Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................45 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.

Comfort and Convenience Features.........................................................................................................81 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.

Before Driving .............................................................................................................................................123 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.

Driving ...........................................................................................................................................................135 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.

Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................159 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer. Taking Care of the Unexpected...............................................................................................................195 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.

Technical Information ...............................................................................................................................215 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.

Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ......................................................................229 A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us.

Index ................................................................................................................................................................. I

Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

Page 2: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

This Owner’s Manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle, and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This Owner’s Manual covers all models ofthe Pilot. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33S9VC10

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

Page 3: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2004 Honda Pilot was a wise investment.It will give you years of driving pleasure.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manualhelps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Hondadealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique toyour Honda. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will bepleased to answer any questions and concerns.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Honda, otherproperty, or the environment.

WARNING:

Introduction

i

Page 4: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

--

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thiscar safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

on the vehicle.Safety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

Safety Labels

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

Page 5: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Your Pilot has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher groundclearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.

These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a highcenter of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have asignificantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantlymore likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wearseat belts.

For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page of this manual and thesection on page . Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an

accident.155

136Off-Highway Guidelines

Important Handling Information

iii

Page 6: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Your Vehicle at a Glance

2

GAUGES

POWER DOOR LOCKSWITCHES

MIRRORCONTROLS

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

AUDIO SYSTEM

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL

REAR A/C CONTROL

(P. 54)INSTRUMENT PANEL (P. 47)

(P. 65)

(P. 74)

(P. 73)

(P. 126)

(P. 125) (P. 75)(P. 87)

(P. 86)

(P. 88)

Page 7: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Your Vehicle at a Glance

3

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

LIGHT CONTROLSWITCH

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

CRUISE CONTROL WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

VTM-4 LOCK

HORN(P. 58)

(P. 79)

(P. 101) (P. 61)(P. 116)

(P. 57)

(P. 60)

(P. 142)

CRUISECONTROLMASTERSWITCH(P. 116)

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON(P. 59)

Page 8: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

4

Page 9: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

--

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat beltsproperly. It explains how yourairbags work. And it tells you how toproperly restrain infants andchildren in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8...........................................Airbags . 9

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 10.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 10

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 10............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 11

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 125. Fasten and Position the

...Lap/Shoulder Seat Belts . 12....6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 14

7. Maintain a Proper Sitting................................Position . 14

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 15...Additional Safety Precautions . 16

Additional Information About Your.................................Seat Belts . 17

..Seat Belt System Components . 17......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 18

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 19Additional Information About

..........................Your Airbags . 19......Airbag System Components . 19

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 20

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 22How the SRS Indicator Light

.......................................Works . 23How The Side Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 23.............................Airbag Service . 24

...Additional Safety Precautions . 24Protecting Children General

................................Guidelines . 25All Children Must Be

...............................Restrained . 25

All Children Should Sit in the.................................Back Seat . 26

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 26

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 28

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 28

...Additional Safety Precautions . 28...........................Protecting Infants . 29

.............Protecting Small Children . 30.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 31....................Installing a Child Seat . 32

Installing a Child Seat Using.....................................LATCH . 33

Installing a Child Seat with a..................Lap/shoulder Belt . 35

Installing a Child Seat with a......................................Tether . 37

...........Protecting Larger Children . 38...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 39

..................Using a Booster Seat . 39...Additional Safety Precautions . 41

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 42...................................Safety Labels . 43

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety 5

Page 10: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbagssupplement seat belts, but airbagsare designed to inflate only in amoderate to severe frontal or sidecollision. So even though yourvehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat. Infants and small childrenshould be restrained in a child seat.Larger children should use a boosterand a lap/shoulder belt until they

can use the belt properly without abooster (see page ). Excessive speed is a major factor in

crash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual (see page

).

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

12

25

9

161

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Restrain All Children

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Don’t Drink and Drive

Driver and Passenger Safety6

Page 11: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.Some safety features do not requireany action on your part. Theseinclude a strong steel frameworkthat forms a safety cage around thepassenger compartment; front andrear crush zones, a collapsiblesteering column, and seat belttensioners that tighten the front seatbelts in the event of a crash.However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesesafety features unless you remainsitting in a proper position andalways wear your seat belts properly.In fact, some safety features cancontribute to injuries if they are notused properly.The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

CONTINUED

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Safety 7

(7)(10)

(9) (3) (1) (4)

(2)(6)(10)

(7) (8)(5)

(2)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats & Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Airbags(8) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(9) Door Locks(10) Side Airbags

Page 12: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument panelto remind you and your passengersto fasten your seat belts.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats).

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag, andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

When properly worn, seat belts:

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan take an active role in maximizingyour safety.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What You Should Do:

Driver and Passenger Safety8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, evenif you have airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

Page 13: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Your vehicle has a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact. (See page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork.)

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright, and as far back from thesteering wheel while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. A frontpassenger should move their seat asfar back from the dashboard aspossible.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

To dotheir job, airbags must inflate withtremendous force. So whileairbags help save lives, they cancause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

20

22

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Safety

Airbags

What you should do:

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.Airbags can pose hazards.

9

Page 14: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors andtailgate are closed and locked.

Your vehicle has a door and tailgatemonitor indicator on the instrumentpanel to indicate when a specificdoor or the tailgate is not tightlyclosed.

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

See page for how to lock thedoors, and page for how themonitor light works.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injures ordeaths that can occur in severecrashes, even where seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengersand teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to ride inthe front seat.

See page for important guidelineson how to properly protect infants,small children, and larger childrenwho ride in your vehicle.

65

26

50

Close and Lock the Doors Adjust the Front Seats1. 2.

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety10

Page 15: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

See page for how to adjust seat-backs.

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked into position. Seepage for how to adjust the frontseats.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

68

68

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

11

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

Page 16: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe back of your head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

Have passengers with adjustablerestraints adjust their restraintsproperly as well. Taller personsshould adjust their restraint as highas possible.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Also checkthat the belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

In the second row center seat andthe third row seats, be sure thedetachable anchors are also latched(see page ).

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

72

72

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Head Restraints Fasten and Position the Lap/Shoulder Seat Belts

4. 5.

Driver and Passenger Safety12

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Page 17: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

To adjust the height of a front seatbelt anchor, press and hold therelease buttons and slide the anchorup or down as needed (it has fourpositions).

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your Honda dealer check thebelt as soon as possible.

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

13

RELEASEBUTTON

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

Page 18: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,so that the wheel points toward yourchest, not toward your face. Thisprovides optimal protection from thefront airbag.

See page for how to adjust thesteering wheel.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

61

17

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Steering Wheel Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6. 7.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

14

Page 19: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a check-up, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag. Being struckby an inflating side airbag canpossibly result in serious injuries.

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety

Advice for Pregnant Women

15

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

Page 20: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

All passengersmust sit in locked, upright seatsand be properly restrained by seatbelts.

A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt can

reduce the protective capability ofthe seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp objects inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or if bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thevehicle and hurt someone.

Never let passengers ride in thecargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat.

Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door.

Additional Safety Precautions

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

16

Page 21: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat (seepage ).

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all eight seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

The lap/shoulder belt in the centerseat of the second and third rowseats is equipped with a detachableanchor that has two parts: a smalllatch plate and a buckle.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

If you continue driving withoutfastening your seat belt, the beepersounds and the indicator flashesagain at regular intervals.

The detachable anchor shouldnormally be latched whenever theseats-backs are in an upright position.For more information about thedetachable anchor (see page ).

The lap and shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

If you turn the ignition switch to ON(II) before fastening your seat belt,the beeper sounds and the indicatorflashes. If you do not fasten yourseat belt before the beeper stops, theindicator stops flashing but remainson.

3512

72

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver and Passenger Safety

Lap/Shoulder BeltSeat Belt System Components

17

Page 22: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalmanner.

However, the tensioners can beactivated during a collision in whichthe front airbags do not deploy. Inthis case, the airbags would not beneeded, but the additional restraintcould be helpful.

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

The tensioners are designed toactivate primarily in frontal collisions,and they should activate in anycollision severe enough to causefront-airbag inflation.

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle, andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the belt, pull it out only asfar as needed.

To unlatch the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle.

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver and Passenger Safety

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

18

Page 23: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Your airbag system includes:

Two SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG.’’

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe frontal or sidecollision.

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page .

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. Any belt thatis not in good condition or notworking properly will not providegood protection and should bereplaced as soon as possible.

Honda provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts for U.S. models. Seeyourbooklet for details.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

22

18

184

Honda Warranty Information

Airbag System ComponentsSeat Belt Maintenance

Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts, Additional Information About Your Airbags

19

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

Page 24: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, and driver andfront passenger seat belt use whenthe ignition is in the ON (II)position.

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration. If the rate ofdeceleration is high enough, thecontrol unit will instantly inflate thedriver’s and front passenger’s frontairbags, at the time and with theforce needed.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the airbag helps protect yourhead and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags (seepage ).

18

23

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Front Airbags Work

Driver and Passenger Safety20

Page 25: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whetheror not the occupant is wearing a seatbelt.

If the occupant’s belt , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at the samethreshold as a conventional airbag,because the occupant would needextra protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

is latched

Dual-Threshold Airbags

not latched

less severe

more severe

Dual-Stage Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety 21

Page 26: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, the sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

When you turn the ignition ON (II),the indicator should light briefly andgo out (see page ). If it doesn’tlight, stays on, or comes on whiledriving without a passenger in thefront seat, have the system checked.

The passenger’s side airbag has acutoff system designed to turn offthe passenger’s side airbag if a child’shead is in the airbag’s deploymentpath (see page ).

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

If the side airbag cutoff indicatorcomes on, have the passenger situpright. Once the passenger is out ofthe deployment path of the sideairbag, the system will turn theairbag back on and the indicator willgo out.

23

23

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety

How Your Side Airbags Work

22

Page 27: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

This indicator alerts youthat the passenger’s side

airbag has been automatically shutoff. It does mean there is aproblem with your side airbags.

To reduce the risk of injury from aninflating side airbag, your vehicle hasan automatic cutoff system for thepassenger’s side airbag.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, this systemis designed to shut off the sideairbag if a child leans sideways andthe child’s head is in the side airbagdeployment path.

If a short adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the side airbagdeployment path, the system mayalso shut off the side airbag.

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your front airbags, side airbags,or front seat belt tensioners (seepage ).

When you turn the ignition to ON(II), this indicator will light brieflythen go out. This tells you that thesystem is working properly.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

48

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety

How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

How the SRS Indicator Works

not

23

Ignoring the SRS indicator lightcan result in serious injury ordeath if the airbag systems, ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

Page 28: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

If water or another liquidsoaks into a seat-back, it canprevent the side airbag cutoffsystem from working properly.

Improperlyreplacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your sideairbags from inflating during aside impact.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance-free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. If afront airbag inflates the seat belttensioners must also be replaced.Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by a Honda dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

Take your vehicle toan authorized Honda dealer assoon as possible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to shut off.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Safety PrecautionsAirbag ServiceDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front seat-backsto liquid.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consulting aHonda dealer.

An airbag ever inflates.

The SRS indicator light alerts youto a problem.

24

Page 29: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions many adults do not knowhow to properly protect childpassengers.

If you have children, or if you everneed to drive with a child in yourvehicle, be sure to read this section.It begins with important generalguidelines, then presents specialinformation for infants, smallchildren, and larger children.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Driver and Passenger Safety

All Children Must Be Restrained

25

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster if necessary.

Page 30: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

(see pages ).

(see pages ).

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in theback seat. The National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration andTransport Canada recommend thatall children age 12 and under beproperly restrained in the back seat.

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by an

inflating airbag when they ride in theback.

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do thisthe passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, in a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

29 31

38 41

38

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Driver and Passenger Safety

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster until the seat belt f its themproperly

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith passenger’s front airbag can behazardous.

Children who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

Infants

Small Children

Larger ChildrenAll Children Should Sit in theBack Seat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

26

Page 31: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin the back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard andon the driver’s and front passenger’svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

To remind you of the front airbaghazards, your vehicle has warninglabels on the driver’s and frontpassenger’s visors. Please read andfollow the instructions on theselabels.

Protecting Children General Guidelines

U.S. Models Canadian Models

Driver and Passenger Safety 27

Page 32: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

If a child requires physical attentionor frequent visual contact, westrongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

Your vehicle has two rows of backseats where children can be properlyrestrained. If you ever have to carrya group of children, and a child mustride in front:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap. If you are not wearing aseat belt in crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child. During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt. If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Use childproof door locks toprevent children from opening thedoors. This can prevent childrenfrom accidentally falling out.

38

10

26

12

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

Additional Safety Precautions

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Driver and Passenger Safety28

Page 33: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Do not leave children alone in avehicle. Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous. Forexample, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition can accidentally set thevehicle in motion, possibly injuringthemselves or others.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

Lock all doors and the tailgatewhen your vehicle is not in use.Children who play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles.

Keep vehicle keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren. Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignition,and open the trunk, which canlead to accidental injury or death.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting InfantsChild Seat Type

Protecting Children General Guidelines, Protecting Infants

29

Page 34: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

We strongly recommend installing arear-facing child seat in a back seat.

If the passenger’sfront airbag inflates, it can hit theback of the child seat with enoughforce to kill or seriously injure aninfant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving the seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theseat-back in the desired position, andinterfering with the proper operationof the passenger’s advanced frontairbag (see page ).

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat in a different backseating position or get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

22

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Small ChildrenChild Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat.

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

30

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbag inflates.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

Page 35: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two second-row seat.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose between a conventionalchild seat, or one designed for usewith the Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) system.

We also recommend that a smallchild stay in the child seat as long aspossible, until the child reaches theweight or height limit for the seat.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle, and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

CONTINUED

Selecting a Child Seat

Driver and Passenger Safety

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

Selecting a Child Seat

31

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

Page 36: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

After selecting a proper child seat,and a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for Children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position, or positions,where the seat will be used.

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

We also recommend selecting aLATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,rather than a flexible, anchor (seepage ).

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

33

Driver and Passenger Safety

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

32

Page 37: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat andanchors.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for Children) at the secondrow seats. The lower anchors arelocated between the seat-back andseat bottom, and are to be used onlywith a child seat designed for usewith LATCH.

The location of each lower anchor ismarked with a small circle above thepoint.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for a rear-facing child seat.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid’’. Some side-to-sidemovement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

1.

2.

Installing a Child Seat

Driver and Passenger Safety

Installing a Child Seat UsingLATCH

Secure the child in the child seat.3.

33

LOWERANCHORS

Page 38: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchorage point on theunderside of the seat cushion,then tighten the strap asinstructed by the child seat maker.Make sure the strap is not twisted.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Other LATCH-compatible seats havea flexible-type connection as shownabove.

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, and attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connection asshown above.

4.

5.

6.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

Driver and Passenger Safety34

FLEXIBLE TYPERIGID TYPE

Page 39: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

1. 2.

3.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat

Driver and Passenger Safety

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt

35

Page 40: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is firmly secured. Ifthe child seat is not secure,unlatch the belt, allow it to retractfully, then repeat these steps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

After confirming that the belt islocked, then grab the shoulderpart of the belt near the buckleand pull up to remove any slackfrom the lap part of the belt.Remember, if the lap part of thebelt is not tight, the child seat willnot be secure.

To remove slack, it may help to putweight on the child seat, or push onthe back of the seat while pulling upon the belt.

4. 5.

Installing a Child Seat

Driver and Passenger Safety36

Page 41: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Your vehicle has attachment pointsfor a tether-style child seat to beinstalled on the second or third rowas shown.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable. (Tethers are required inCanada.)

Each second row seat has a tetheranchorage point behind the seatback.

There are three anchorage points onthe tailgate sill. Select the anchoragepoint you want to use, and slide thecover to open it (outboard anchor),or remove the cover (center anchor).

Second Seat Installation: Third Seat Installation:

Installing a Child Seat

Driver and Passenger Safety

Installing a Child Seat with aTether

37

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT

Page 42: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster and wear a lap/shoulder belt.The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

Lift the head restraint, then routethe tether strap over the seat-backbetween the legs of the headrestraint.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether attachment point, and tightenthe strap according to the child seatmaker’s instructions. Make sure thestrap is not twisted.

Installing a Child Seat, Protecting Larger Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Larger Children

38

Allowing a large child age 12 orunder to sit in front can result ininjury or death if the passenger’sfront airbag inflates.

If a large child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

Page 43: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Some states also require children touse a booster until they reach agiven age or weight (e.g., 6 years or60 lbs). Be sure to check currentlaws in the state or states where youintend to drive.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Protecting Larger Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Checking Seat Belt Fit Using a Booster Seat

39

Page 44: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

If the passenger’s front airbag is on,and it inflates in a moderate tosevere frontal collision, the airbagcan cause serious injuries to a childwho is unrestrained, improperlyrestrained, sitting too close to theairbag, or out of position.

The side airbag also poses risks. Ifany part of a larger child’s body is inthe path of a deploying side airbag,the child could receive possiblyserious injuries.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in thefront. There are other importantfactors you should consider.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see page ). If the seatbelt does not fit properly, with orwithout the child sitting on a booster,the child should not sit in the front.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster meets federalsafety standards (see page ) andthat you follow the booster seatmaker’s instructions.

If a child who uses a booster mustride in front, move the vehicle seatas far to the rear as possible, and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster.

39

25

Protecting Larger Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front Maturity

Physical Size

40

Page 45: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manualand make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly positioned and secured.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

This could result inserious neck injuries during a crash.

This could causevery serious injuries during a crash.It also increases the chance that thechild will slide under the belt in acrash and be injured.

If they do, they couldbe very seriously injured in a crash.

Devices intended to improve achild’s comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt can makethe belt less effective, and increasethe chance of serious injury in acrash.

Protecting Larger Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the back orunder the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on a seatbelt.

Additional Safety Precautions

41

Page 46: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. You shouldhave no problem with carbonmonoxide entering the vehicle innormal driving if you maintain yourvehicle properly.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged the under-side.

With the tailgate open, air flow canpull exhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetailgate open, open all the windowsand set the heating and coolingsystem/climate control system asshown below.

If you must sit in your parked vehicle,even in an unconfined area, with theengine running, adjust the heatingand cooling system/climate controlsystem as follows:

Select the Fresh Air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Driver and Passenger Safety42

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

Page 47: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully. Ifa label comes off or becomes hard toread, contact your Honda dealer fora replacement.

U.S. models only U.S. models

Canadian models

Safety Labels

Driver and Passenger Safety 43

RADIATOR CAP

SUN VISOR

HOOD

DASHBOARD

BATTERY LABEL

Page 48: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

44

Page 49: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour Honda. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 46............................Instrument Panel . 47

.............................................Gauges . 54...............Odometer/Trip Meter . 54

..................................Fuel Gauge . 54...................Temperature Gauge . 55

....Outside Temperature Gauge . 55Controls Near the Steering

...........................................Wheel . 56.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 57

...........Turn Signal and Headlights . 58........Instrument Panel Brightness . 59

.................Hazard Warning Button . 59

.................Rear Window Defogger . 60..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 61

...............................Keys and Locks . 62........................Immobilizer System . 62

................................Ignition Switch . 64......................................Door Locks . 65

......................Power Door Locks . 65..............Childproof Door Locks . 65

.......................Remote Transmitter . 66..................................Seats Heaters . 67

.................................................Seats . 68..............................Power Windows . 73

.............................................Mirrors . 74

.................................Parking Brake . 75...........Interior Convenience Items . 76

.......................Beverage Holders . 77...............Console Compartment . 77

......................Sunglasses Holder . 78....................................Glove Box . 78

......................................Sun Visor . 78...............................................Lights . 79

Instruments and Controls

Instruments and Controls 45

Page 50: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Control Locations

Instruments and Controls46

POWER DOOR LOCKSWITCHES

MIRRORCONTROLS

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

AUDIO SYSTEM

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL

REAR A/C CONTROL

AND GAUGES (P.47)INDICATORS

(P.65)

(P.74)

(P.73)

(P.126)

(P.125) (P.75)(P.87)

(P.86)

(P.88)

Page 51: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

* CONTINUEDThe U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Instrument Panel

Instruments and Controls 47

SIDE AIRBAGCUTOFF INDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATORLAMP

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

DOOR AND TAILGATEOPEN MONITOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM INDICATOR

VTM-4 INDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR

HIGH BEAMINDICATOR

A/T TEMPERATUREINDICATOR

MAINTENANCEREQUIREDINDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR

BRAKE LAMP INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

LOW FUELINDICATOR

OUTSIDETEMPERATUREDISPLAY

PARKING BRAKEAND BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR

(P.49)

(P.48)

(P.48)

(P.48)

(P.48)

(P.50)

(P.48)

(P.52)

(P.48)

(P.50)

(P.51)

(P.51)

(P.55)

(P.53)

(P.49)

(P.52)

(P.51)

(P.49)

Page 52: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II). Ifit comes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For complete information, see page

.

See page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II). Ifit comes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This indicator willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff systemor automatic seat belt tensioners.For complete information, see page

.

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II). Itreminds you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts. A beeper alsosounds if you have not fastened yourseat belt.

If you continue driving withoutfastening your seat belt, the beepersounds and the indicator flashesagain at regular intervals.

If you turn the ignition switch to ON(II) before fastening your seat belt,the beeper sounds and the indicatorflashes. If you do not fasten yourseat belt before the beeper stops, theindicator stops flashing but remainson.

207

206

206

23

23

Instruments and Controls

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Side Airbag Off Indicator

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Instrument Panel

48

Page 53: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

This indicator has two functions: This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III). If it comes on at anyother time, there is a problem in theABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis indicator on, your vehicle stillhas normal braking ability but notanti-lock. For complete information,see page .

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). It is areminder to check the parkingbrake. Driving with the parkingbrake not fully released candamage the brakes and tires.A chime also sounds if you try todrive with the parking brake on.

If it remains lit after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For complete information,see page .

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II). It will go off if youhave inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine will not start (seepage ).

1.

2. 145

208

62

Instruments and Controls

Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicator

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)Indicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Instrument Panel

49

U.S. Canada U.S. Canada

Page 54: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the indicators do not blinkor blink rapidly, it usually means oneof the turn signal bulbs is burned out(see page ). Replace the bulb assoon as possible, since other driverscannot see that you are signaling.

If a brake light does not work, theindicator comes on

when you push the brake pedal withthe ignition switch in the ON (II)position.

A burned out brake light is a hazardwhen drivers behind you cannot tellyou are braking. Have your brakelights repaired right away.

The appropriate indicator comes onin this display if the tailgate or anydoor is not closed tightly.

All the indicators in the monitordisplay come on for a few secondswhen you turn the ignition switch toON (II).

When you push the Hazard Warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsblink. All turn signals on the outsideof the vehicle should flash.

181

Instruments and Controls

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Brake Lamp Indicator Door and Tailgate Open Monitor

Instrument Panel

50

BRAKE LAMP

Page 55: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. See page

for information on the headlightcontrols.

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the Daytime Running Lights(DRL) are on (see page ).

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II)with the headlight switch off and theparking brake set. It should go off ifyou turn on the headlights or releasethe parking brake. If it comes on atany other time, it means there is aproblem with the DRL. There mayalso be a problem with the highbeam headlights.

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator comes on as areminder that you must refuel soon.

This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicatorcome on (see page ).

116

58

59

175

Canadian models only Canadian models only

High Beam Indicator‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Low Fuel Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

Instruments and Controls

Instrument Panel

51

Page 56: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

This indicator monitors thetemperature of the automatictransmission fluid. It comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). If it comeson while driving, it indicates thetransmission fluid temperature is toohigh. Pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, shift to Park, and letthe engine idle until the light goesout.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). If thisindicator comes on at any other time,there is a problem in the 4WDsystem. Have your vehicle checkedby a dealer.

If the indicator blinks while driving,pull to the side of the road when it issafe, shift to Park, and let the engineidle until the indicator goes out.

Instruments and Controls

A/T TemperatureIndicator

VTM-4 Indicator

Instrument Panel

52

Continuing to drive with the VTM-4indicator blinking may cause seriousdamage to the 4WD system.

Continuing to drive with the A/TTemperature indicator on may causeserious damage to the transmission.

Page 57: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)after the Maintenance RequiredIndicator is reset, it will come on fortwo seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II).

Refer to the Maintenance Schedulesfor Normal and Severe DrivingConditions on pages and .

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your vehicle in forscheduled maintenance.

If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

Your dealer will reset this indicatorafter completing the scheduledmaintenance. If this maintenance isdone by someone other than yourHonda dealer, reset the indicator asfollows.

Turn off the engine.

Press and hold the Select/Resetbutton on the instrument panel,then turn the ignition switch ON(II).

Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and7,500 miles (12,000 km) thisindicator will light for two secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II), and then flash forten seconds.

Hold the button for approximatelyten seconds until the indicatorresets.

165164

1.

2.

3.

Instrument Panel

Instruments and Controls

Maintenance Required Indicator

53

MAINTENANCE REQUIRED INDICATOR

SELECT/RESET BUTTON

Page 58: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Each trip meter works independently,so you can keep track of twodifferent distances.

The odometer shows the total dis-tance your vehicle has been driven.It measures miles in U.S. models andkilometers in Canadian models.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the Select/Resetbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0’’. Both trip meters will reset ifthe vehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays and the outside temperaturedisplay (EX model only) by pressingthe Select/Reset button repeatedly.

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

Trip Meter

Odometer

Fuel Gauge

Gauges

Instruments and Controls54

TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE TEMPERATUREGAUGE

TRIP METERSELECT/RESETBUTTONTRIP METER

ODOMETER

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

Page 59: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle white mark. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise to theupper white mark. If it reaches thered (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. Turn to page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. Therefore, the temper-ature reading can be affected by heatreflection from the road surface, en-gine heat, and the exhaust fromsurrounding traffic. This can causean incorrect temperature readingwhen your speed is under19 mph (30 km/h).

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.models) or Centigrade (Canadianmodels). To see the outsidetemperature, press and release theSelect/Reset button until thetemperature is displayed.

The sensor delays the display updateuntil it reaches the correct out sidetemperature, this may take severalminutes.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

204

On EX modelTemperature Gauge Outside Temperature Indicator

Gauges

Instruments and Controls 55

Page 60: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

* To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls56

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

VTM-4 LOCK

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

HORN

LIGHT CONTROLSWITCH

CRUISE CONTROL

REARWINDOWDEFOGGER

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

(P.58)

(P.79)

(P.116)

(P.101)

(P.61)

(P.116)

(P.57)

(P.60)

(P.59)(P.142)

CRUISECONTROLMASTERSWITCH

HAZARDWARNINGBUTTON

Page 61: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

---

--

-MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO LowHI HighWindshield Washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers run at low speed.The wipers run at high speed.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The length of the wiperinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to the vehicle’s speed.

Vary the delay by turning the INTTIME ring. If you turn it to theshortest delay, the wipers willchange to low speed operationwhen the vehicle speed exceeds 12mph (20 km/h).

Pull thewiper control lever toward you andhold it. The washers spray untilyou release the lever. The wipersrun at low speed, then completeone more sweep after you releasethe lever.

Rotate the switch clockwise toturn the rear window wiper ON.Hold past ON to turn the windowwiper on and the window washerto spray.OFFRotate the switchcounterclockwise to turn thewindow wiper on and the windowwasher to spray.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

1.

2.

3.4.

Rear Window Wiper and Washer

OFF

LOHI

MIST

INT

Windshield Washer

Windshield Wipers and Washers

Instruments and Controls 57

Page 62: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

-Turn SignalHeadlights OnHigh Beams

Push down on theleft lever to signal a left turn and upto signal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever andhold it. The lever will return tocenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

This feature turns off the headlights,fog lights, parking lights, taillights,side marker lights, license platelights, and instrument panel lightswithin 15 seconds of removing thekey from the ignition switch andclosing the driver’s door.

This feature activates if you leavethe headlight switch in the ‘‘ ’’or ‘‘ ’’ position, remove the key,then open and close the driver’s door.If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the doorand get out, the lights will turn offafter 10 minutes.

Rotating switchon the left lever to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the parking lights,taillights, instrument panel lights,side-marker lights, and rear licenseplate lights. Turning the switch tothe ‘‘ ’’ position turns on theheadlights. If you leave the lights onwith the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position, you will hear a reminderchime when you open the driver’sdoor.

To turn on, pushthe lever forward until you hear aclick. The blue high beam indicatorwill light (see page ). Pull it backto return to low beams. To flash thehigh beams, pull the lever backlightly, then release it. The highbeams will stay on as long as youhold the lever back.

1.2.3.

51

On EX model

Turn Signal

Automatic Lighting Off FeatureHeadlights On

High Beams

Instruments and Controls

Turn Signal and Headlights

58

Page 63: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver’s dooropen, you will hear a lights-onreminder chime.

With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II) andrelease the parking brake. Theyremain on until you turn the ignitionoff, even if you set the parking brake.

Push the red button to turn on thehazard warning lights (four-wayflashers). This causes all fouroutside turn signals and bothindicators in the instrument panel toflash. Use the hazard warning lightsif you need to park in a dangerousarea near heavy traffic, or if yourvehicle is disabled.

The knob on the instrument panelcontrols the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights. Turn the knob toadjust the brightness.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn the switchto the ‘‘ ’’ position.

Instruments and Controls

(Canadian Models)Daytime Running Lights

Instrument Panel Brightness Hazard Warning Button

Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button

59

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESSCONTROL KNOB

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

Page 64: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicatorabove the button lights to show thedefogger is on. If you do not turn itoff, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignition.You have to turn it on again whenyou restart the vehicle.

The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side-to-side.

Rear Window Defogger

Instruments and Controls60

EX model LX model

Page 65: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Move the steering wheel so itpoints to your chest, not towardyour face. Make sure you can seethe instrument panel gauges andindicators.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up and down.

1.

2.

3.

4.

See page for important safetyinformation about how to properlyposition the steering wheel.

14

Instruments and Controls

Steering Wheel Adjustment

61

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

Page 66: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the doorlocks. You can keep the glove boxlocked when you leave your vehicleand the valet key at a parking facility.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your set of keys.You will need this key number if youever have to get a key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theImmobilizer System. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

Keys and Locks, Immobilizer System

Instruments and Controls

Immobilizer System

62

VALET KEY(GRAY)

MASTERKEY(BLACK)

KEYNUMBERTAG

Page 67: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

The Immobilizer System protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the Immobilizer Systemindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go out. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0), remove the key, reinsertit, and turn the switch to ON (II)again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your Honda dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undriveable.

If you have lost your key and cannotstart your engine, contact a Hondadealer.

Instruments and Controls

Immobilizer System

63

Page 68: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

--

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, the shift lever mustbe in Park, and you must push thekey in slightly.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to ON (II) when you let go ofthe key.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of thelights on the instrument panel comeon as a test when you turn theignition switch from ACCESSORY(I) to ON (II).

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

Ignition Switch

Instruments and Controls

LOCK (0)START (III)

ON (II)

ACCESSORY (I)

64

Page 69: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Each door has a lock tab on the top.When you push down the tab on thedriver’s door or use the key, all thedoors and the tailgate lock. To lockthe front passenger’s door, push thelock tab down and close the door.

To unlock only the driver’s doorfrom the outside, turn the key andrelease it. If you turn the key andhold it, all doors and the tailgateunlock. All four doors and the

tailgate unlock when you use the keyin the passenger’s door.

With the driver’s door open and thekey in the ignition, both master doorlock switches are disabled. They arenot disabled if the driver’s door isclosed. Pushing the switch down onthe open passenger’s door will lockall doors.

To open the tailgate, pull the handle,then lift up. To close the tailgate, usethe inner handle to pull it down, thenpress down on the back edge.

Keep the tailgate closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging itand to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

, page .

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up and use the outside doorhandle.

42

Door Locks

Instruments and Controls

Power Door Locks

Lockout Prevention

Tailgate

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

Childproof Door Locks

65

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

LOCK COVER

Page 70: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

▽◎

To replace the battery, remove theround cover on the back of thetransmitter by turning itcounterclockwise with a coin. Inserta new battery with the side facingup. Align the mark on thecover with the mark on thetransmitter. Set the cover in placeand turn it clockwise.

Press this button once tolock all doors and the tailgate. Someexterior and interior lights will flash.When you push LOCK twice within 5seconds, you will hear a beep toverify that the security system hasset. You cannot lock it if any door isnot fully closed or key is in theignition switch.

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the other doors and

the tailgate. If you do not open anydoors or the tailgate within 30seconds, they will automaticallyrelock.

Press this button forabout one second to attract attention;the horn will sound and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter or turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by a Honda dealer.

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doorsand the tailgate, replace the batteryas soon as possible.Battery type: CR2025

Remote Transmitter

Instruments and Controls

LOCK

UNLOCK

PANIC

Remote Transmitter Care

Replacing the Transmitter Battery

66

UNLOCKBUTTON

LED LOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

BATTERY

ROUNDCOVER

Page 71: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat’s temperature drops.

In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The passenger seatonly has heaters in the seat bottombecause of side airbag system. Theignition switch must be in the ON(II) position to use them. Push thetop of the switch, HI, to rapidly heatup the seat. After the seat reaches acomfortable temperature, select LOby pushing the bottom of the switch.This will keep the seat warm.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Instruments and Controls

Remote Transmitter, Seat Heaters

Seat Heaters(If equipped)

67

SEAT HEATERS

Page 72: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

To change the lumbar support, movethe lever on the right side of theseat-back forward or backward.Keep moving the lever forward orbackward until you find a suitableposition.

The controls for the poweradjustable driver’s seat are on theoutside edge of the seat bottom. Youcan adjust the power seat with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.

Moving the long horizontal switchadjusts the seat bottom in severaldirections. The seat bottom adjustsin the direction you move the switch.The short vertical switch adjusts theseat back angle.

Adjusts the seat-backangle forward orbackward.

Raises or lowers theseat.

Moves the front of theseat up or down andthe rear of the seat upor down.

Moves the seatforward and backward.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

On EX modelOn EX model1110

Seats

Instruments and Controls

Driver’s Lumbar SupportPower Seat Adjustment

68

Page 73: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

To adjust the seat forward andbackward, pull up on the lever underthe front seat cushion. Then try tomove the seat to make sure it islocked into position.

To change the seat-back angle of thefront seat, pull up on the lever on theoutside of the seat bottom.

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. Turn the front dial on theoutside of the seat cushion to raisethe front of the seat bottom, and turnthe rear dial to raise the rear.

On LX model

Seats

Instruments and Controls

Manual Seat Adjustments Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment

69

Page 74: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

To change the angle of the seats inthe second row seat-backs, pull upthe handle on the seat-back. Movingthe short vertical switch forward orbackward adjusts the seat back inthose directions.

The left and right halves can befolded separately.

Push the whole seat backwards untilfully latches. Make sure the seat islocked and secured before driving.

If you are folding the left half ofthe seat, use the ignition key torelease the center seat belt fromthe detachable anchor (see page

).

Lower the head restraint fully.

Pull up the handle on the outsideof the seat-back.

Fold the seat-back forward.

Reverse this procedure to return theseat to its upright position. Makesure the seat is locked and securedbefore driving.

To get into the third row seats, pullup the lever on the outside of thepassenger’s side second row seat-back. The seat-back will tilt forward,and the seat will slide forward.

To adjust the seats forward andbackward, pull up on the lever underthe seat cushion. After moving theseat, make sure it is locked intoposition.

2.

3.

1.

4.

72

Seats

Instruments and Controls

Adjusting the Second Row Seats Folding the Second Row Seats Third Seat Access

70

SECONDROW SEAT RELEASE LEVER

Page 75: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Remove the head restraints bypushing the release buttons andpulling the restraints out.

Store the head restraints underthe cargo area floor. Insert theshafts into the holes in the sides ofthe storage compartment.

Use the ignition key to release theseat belt from the detachableanchor. See page .

Unlock the seat-back by pullingthe handle. Push the seat-backforward.

Make sure you clip the small latchplate of each outer shoulder belt tothe seat belt webbing whenever thethird seat is folded.

Pull the handle on the back of theseat, move the seat-back to thedesired position and release thehandle. Let the seat-back latch intothe new position.

Make sure all items in the cargo areaare secured. Loose items can flyforward and cause injury if you haveto brake hard. Seeon page .

Reinstall the head restraints,reconnect the seat belts, and makesure the seats are secured beforedriving.

Reverse this procedure to return theseat to its upright position.1.

2.

3.

4.

80

131

Seats

Instruments and Controls

Adjusting the Third Row Seat Folding the Third Row Seat

Carrying Cargo

71

THIRD ROWSEAT HANDLE

Page 76: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

12

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers whiplash and otherinjuries.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint.

The head restraints in the secondand third row seats adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust therestraint. To raise it, pull upward. Tolower it, push the release buttonsideways, and push the restraintdown.

To unlatch the detachable anchor,insert a key into the slot on the sideof the small buckle. Line up thetriangle marks on the plate andbuckle when reattaching the belt andbuckle.

Seats

Instruments and Controls

Detachable Seat Belt AnchorsHead Restraints

72

RELEASE BUTTON

TRIANGULAR MARK

SMALL LATCH PLATE

Using a seat belt with thedetachable anchor unlatchedincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Before using the seat belt,make sure the detachableanchor is correctly latched.

Page 77: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

If the driver’swindow runs into any obstacle whileit is closing automatically, it willreverse direction and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by a Honda dealer.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function will be disabled. Thepower window system needs to bereset after reconnecting the batteryor installing the fuse.

Start the engine. Push down andhold the driver’s window switchuntil the window is fully open.Pull and hold the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor a second or two more.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II)to raise or lower any window. Toopen the window, push the switchdown and hold it. Release the switchwhen you want the window to stop.Pull back on the switch and hold it toclose the window.

To open/close the driver’swindow, push the window switchfirmly down or up to the seconddetent, and release it. The windowwill automatically go up or down allthe way. To stop the window, pull/push on the window switch briefly.

If the MAIN switch is OFF, thepassenger windows cannot be raisedor lowered. Keep the MAIN switchoff when you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

1.

2.

AUTO REVERSE

AUTO

Power Windows

Instruments and Controls 73

DRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

Page 78: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns off theadjustment switch so you can’tmove a mirror out of position byaccidentally bumping the switch.

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

3.

1.

2.

Power Mirror HeatersAdjusting the Power Mirrors(If equipped)

Mirrors

Instruments and Controls74

TAB

SELECTOR SWITCH

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

Page 79: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

To apply the parking brake, push theparking brake pedal down with yourfoot. To release the parking brake,push on the pedal again. The parkingbrake light on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released with theengine running. (see page .)49

Parking Brake

Instruments and Controls 75

NOTICE:

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

Driving the vehicle with theparking brake applied can damage therear brakes and axles.

Page 80: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Instruments and Controls

Interior Convenience Items

76

BEVERAGE HOLDERS

BEVERAGE HOLDERS

COIN BOX

GLOVE BOX

COAT HOOKACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

BEVERAGE HOLDERS(EX ONLY)

CONSOLECOMPARTMENT

Page 81: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the rear door pocket beverageholders when you close the reardoors. Use only resealablecontainers in the door pockets. Thefront beverage holders can beinstalled under the slide.

To open the console compartment,pull up on the lever and lift the lid.

Pivot the from door of the consoleforward and you can store a cellularphone, a small notepad, and businesscards in it.

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement. When more than onesocket is being used, the combinedpower rating of the accessoriesshould be 120 watts or less(10 amps).Spilled liquids can damage the

upholstery, carpeting, and electricalcomponents in the interior.

Interior Convenience Items

Instruments and Controls

Beverage Holders Console CompartmentAccessory Power Sockets

77

Page 82: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

To open and close the sunglassesholder, push on the front edge.Make sure the holder is closed whileyou are driving. Some larger stylesof sunglasses may not fit in theholder.

Open the glove box by pulling thebottom of the handle. Close it with afirm push. Lock or unlock the glovebox with the master key.

The glove box light comes on onlywhen the parking lights are on.

When using the sun visor for theside window, remove the support rodfrom the clip and swing it out. Slidethe extension out to get morecoverage on side windows.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle. Do not usethe sun visor extension over the rearview mirror.

Interior Convenience Items

Instruments and Controls

Glove BoxSunglasses Holder Sun Visor

78

EXTENSION

SUN VISOR

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

Page 83: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

When this switch is in the position:

When this switch is in the position:

When the switch is in theposition:

ONAll the individual map lights comeon.

None of the lights come on when adoor or the tailgate is opened.

OFF

The individual map lights in thefront can be turned on and off withthe switches next to the lights.

The individual map lights in thesecond and third rows cannot beturned on.

DoorActivated

The individual map lights come onwhen any door or the tailgate isopened, or when the remotetransmitter is used to unlock thedoors.

The individual map lights in thesecond and third rows can beturned on and off by pressing thelens.

The tailgate light comes on whenyou open the tailgate if the lightswitch is in the ON position.

The lights go out about 6 secondsafter all the doors and the tailgateare closed. With any door or thetailgate left open, the lights stayon about 3 minutes, then go out.

The courtesy lights in the frontdoors and around the ignition switchcome on when you open any door.After you close the door, the ignitionswitch light stays on for severalseconds.

Instruments and Controls

Lights

Light Control Switch Individual Interior Lights

79

ON

DOORACTIVATEDPOSITION OFF

Page 84: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

80

Page 85: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

...............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 82.........................Air Flow Buttons . 83

...............................Climate Control . 86............................Playing the Radio . 88..........................Radio Reception . 91

....................................Playing a CD . 93................................CD Changer . 94

...................Protecting your CDs . 95.......CD Player Error Messages . 96

...CD Changer Error Messages . 97.................................Playing a Tape . 98

.............Steering Wheel Controls . 101.................Radio Theft Protection . 102

..........................Setting the Clock . 103........Rear Entertainment System . 104

..................DVD Specifications . 112............................Security System . 115

...............................Cruise Control . 116HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 118

Comfort and Convenience Features

Comfort and Convenience Features

81

Page 86: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Comfort and Convenience Features82

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

FAN CONTROLDIAL

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

MODE CONTROL DIAL

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

MODE BUTTON

SET TEMPERATUREINDICATOR

FAN SPEEDINDICATOR

FAN CONTROLBUTTONS

REAL A/CCONTROL

TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIALAUTO BUTTON REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

OFF BUTTON RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

WINDSHIELDDEFROSTBUTTON

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

LX MODEL

EX MODEL

Page 87: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

On LX models

On EX models

On EX models

, turn this dial clockwiseto increase fan speed and increasethe airflow.

, you can manuallyselect the fan speed by pressing thefan control buttons. The fan speed isrepresented by vertical bars in thedisplay.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. The light inthe button is on when the A/C is on.

, you will see A/C ONor A/C OFF in the display. Whenyou turn the A/C off, the systemcannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set the dial belowthe outside temperature.

When the light in the button is on,air from the vehicle’s interior is sentthroughout the system again. Whenthe light is off, air is brought in fromthe outside of the vehicle (Fresh Airmode).

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).

Use the mode control dial or buttonsto select the vents the air flows from.Some air will flow from thedashboard corner vents in all modes.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Air flow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Air flow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

The system should be left in FreshAir mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in Recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

Switch to Recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to Fresh Airmode.

60

Air Flow Buttons

Comfort and Convenience Features

Fan Control

Temperature Control Dial

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Rear Window Defogger Button

Mode Control

Recirculation Button

83

Page 88: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The light in the buttoncomes on when a fan speed isselected.Make sure the temperaturecontrol dial is all the way to the left.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectRecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

The vehicle has two A/C andheater units. The LX units areindependently controlled. The EXunits are controlled by the frontpanel controls, unless the RR A/CManual button is selected.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in Fresh Air mode.

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Select and Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial orbuttons.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereads normally.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C. In this case you cannot turnA/C mode off.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to Fresh Airmode and turns on the A/C.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear sidepanels.

Turn the temperature control dialall the way to the left.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

1.

2.3.4.

1.

2.

3.4.1.

2.3.

5.

55

If the interior is very warm,

Comfort and Convenience Features

Air Flow Buttons, Vents, Heating, and A/C

Using the Heater

Using the A/CVentilation

84

NOTE:

Page 89: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

Switch the fan on.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and Fresh Air mode.Adjust the temperature controldial to your preference.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Set the fan to the desired speed.Select . When you select

, the system automaticallyswitches to Fresh Air mode andturns on the A/C.Adjust the temperature controldial so the airflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.

When you switch to another modefrom , the A/C stays on.Press the A/C button to turn it off.

Select . The systemautomatically switches to FreshAir mode and turns on the A/C.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel below it. This willsend more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents. Once thewindshield is clear, select the FreshAir mode to avoid fogging thewindows.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

1.2.3.4.

1.2.

3.

4.

1.

2.3.

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Comfort and Convenience Features

Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

85

Page 90: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

The Automatic Climate Controlsystem can adjust the fan speed andairflow levels to maintain the interiortemperature you select.

When you set the temperature to itslower or its upper limit, the systemruns at full cooling or heating only. Itdoes not regulate the interiortemperature.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

When you press a fan control button,the fan is taken out of FULL AUTOmode and starts to run at its lowestspeed. Press the buttonrepeatedly to make the fan run faster.

When thesystem is in FULL AUTO, the rearA/C passenger control dial cannotbe used. Pressing the RR A/C buttondisables the FULL AUTO function.

Press the AUTO button.

Set the desired temperature byturning the Temperature Controldial. You will see FULL AUTO inthe system’s display.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the Climate Controlsystem when it is in FULL AUTO.All other features remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordFULL in the display to go out. Seepage .

Press the OFF button. However, alack of air flow can cause thewindows to fog up. It isrecommended that you keep the fanon at all times so stale air andmoisture do not build up in theinterior and cause fogging.

1.

2.

82

Rear A/C Control

On EX models

Climate Control

Comfort and Convenience Features

To Cool or Heat Automatically

Using Automatic Climate Control

Semi-automatic Operation

To Turn Everything Off

86

Page 91: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is in thetop of the dashboard, and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Press the RR A/C button to enablethe rear A/C control knob. Apassenger in the second row can usethe rear control dial to adjust thetemperature up to 21°F (10°C)higher or lower than the front. Thisis limited by the minimum andmaximum system temperatures.

EX models

Climate Control

Comfort and Convenience Features

Using the Rear A/C Unit Sunlight and TemperatureSensors

87

REAR A/C CONTROL BUTTON SUNLIGHT SENSOR

TEMPERATURE SENSORAUTO BUTTON

Page 92: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Playing the Radio

Comfort and Convenience Features88

PWR/VOLKNOB

PWR/VOL KNOB

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

SCANBUTTON SEEK

BUTTONS

TUNE/MODEKNOB

SEEKBUTTONS

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

PWR/VOL KNOBSTEREO INDICATOR

SCANINDICATOR

TUNE KNOB

PRESET BUTTONSSEEK/SKIPBAR

SCAN BUTTON

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

STEREO INDICATOR

FM BUTTON

AM BUTTON

MODEKNOB

AM/FM BUTTON

TUNE/MODE KNOB

SCANBUTTONPRESET BUTTONS

AM/FM BUTTON

EX MODELwith RES EX MODEL

LX MODEL

Page 93: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

- +

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thePWR/VOL knob or the AM/FMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe same knob.

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the /( ) or /( )side of the bar, then release it.

The SCAN functionsamples all stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. You will see SCAN inthe display. The system will scan fora station with a strong signal. Whenit finds one, it will stop and play thatstation for about five seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for five seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM, and twofrequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Pick a preset button, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelvestations on FM.

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction onAM is not available.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: thepreset buttons, and .

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Playing the Radio

Comfort and Convenience Features

To Play the Radio SEEK

SCAN

Preset

TUNE

TUNE, SEEK, SCAN,AUTO SELECT

To Select a Station

89

Page 94: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

- -

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the Auto Select featureto find stations in the local area.

Use the TRE/BASmodes to adjust the tone to yourliking.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is off.

These twomodes adjusts the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the MODE knob toadjust the setting to your liking.When the level reaches the center,you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display. Thesystem will automatically return thedisplay to the selected audio modeabout five seconds after you stopadjusting a mode.

Press the MODE knob repeatedly todisplay the Bass (BAS), Treble(TRE), Balance (BAL), and Fader(FAD) settings.

press theA. SEL button. This restores thepresets you originally set.

Press the A. SEL Button. ‘‘A.SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM, and twelve FM stations inthe preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if AutoSelect cannot find a strong stationfor every preset button.

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find stations, thenstore them in the preset buttons asdescribed previously.

59

To turn off Auto Select,

Playing the Radio

Comfort and Convenience Features

AUTO SELECT

Audio System Lighting

Treble/Bass

Balance/Fader

Adjusting the Sound

90

Page 95: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Your Honda’s radio can receive thecomplete AM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band:530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band:87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least tenkilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

How well your Honda’s radioreceives stations is dependent onmany factors, such as the distancefrom the station’s transmitter,nearby large objects, and atmos-pheric conditions.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

CONTINUED

Radio Reception

Comfort and Convenience Features

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

91

Page 96: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Radio Reception

Comfort and Convenience Features92

Page 97: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Playing a CD

Comfort and Convenience Features 93

PWR/VOL KNOB

RPT BUTTON

REPEAT INDICATOR

CD SLOT

RPTBUTTON

RDMBUTTON

CD EJECTBUTTONCD SLOT

PWR/VOLKNOB

PWR/VOLKNOB

CD SLOT

CD EJECTBUTTON

RPTBUTTON SEEK/SKIP BUTTONSSKIP BUTTONS

SEEK/SKIP BAR RANDOM INDICATOR

RDMBUTTON CD BUTTONCD BUTTON

RDM BUTTON

CD BUTTON

CD EJECTBUTTON

LX MODEL

EX MODELwith RES EX MODEL

Page 98: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

- +

+-

With the ignition in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position,insert a CD into the CD slot. Thedrive will pull the CD in the rest ofthe way and begin to play it.

To continuously replaya track, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay. Press the RPT button againto turn it off.

This feature plays thetracks in random order. To activateRandom Play, press and release theRDM button. You will see RDM inthe display. This continues until youpress the RDM button again.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the CD. If you eject the CD,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe CD after 15 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD button.

A CD changer is available for yourvehicle. It holds up to six CDs. Youoperate the CD changer with thesame controls used for the in-dashCD player.Load the desired CDs in themagazine, and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The CD and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different CD, use the preset 5(DISC ) or preset 6 (DISC )button. If you select an empty slot inthe magazine, the changer will, afterfinding that slot empty, try to loadthe CD in the next slot.

Press the AM/FM button to switchto the radio while a CD is playing.Press the CD button to play the CD.

If you turn the system off while a CD

is playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the CD will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the /( ) or /( ). You will see CUE or REW inthe display.

Each time you press and release/( ), the player skips forward

to the beginning of the next track.Press and release /( ) to skipbackward to the beginning of theprevious track.

You operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio.The number of the track playing isshown in the display. The system willcontinuously play a CD until youchange modes.

Playing a CD, CD Changer

Comfort and Convenience Features

To Play a CD REPEAT

RANDOM

To Stop Playing a CD

Operating the Optional CDChanger

To Change Tracks (SKIP)

94

Page 99: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

When using CD-R discs, use onlyhigh quality CDs labeled for audiouse.

When recording a CD-R, therecording must be closed for it tobe used by the CD players.

CD-RW discs will not work in thisunit.

Play only standard round CDs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

Handle your CDs properly toprevent damage and skipping. Seethis page.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the CD from the centerto the outside edge.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the CD, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the CD to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.

Protecting Your CDs

Comfort and Convenience Features

General Information Protecting CDs

95

Page 100: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a CD, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takeyour vehicle to a Honda dealer.

Error Message Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error,or a DVD hasbeen loaded in theCD player

High Temperature

Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD.Check if it is inserted correctly in the CD player.Make sure the CD is not scratched or damaged.Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD.Check the CD for damage or deformation. Ifthe CD cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the CD isejected, see a Honda Dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

CD Player Error Messages

Comfort and Convenience Features96

Page 101: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a CD, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takeyour vehicle to a Honda dealer.

Error Message Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

No CD in the CDmagazine

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

No CD magazine in theCD changer.

Press the magazine EJECT button and pull itout. Check for an error message, and insert themagazine again. If the message does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,see a Honda dealer.Insert a CD.

Press the magazine EJECT button and pull itout. Check for an error message and insert themagazine again. If the message does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,see a Honda dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Insert CD magazine.

CD Changer Error Messages

Comfort and Convenience Features 97

Page 102: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Comfort and Convenience Features

Playing a Tape

98

RPTBUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

PWR/VOLKNOB

RPTBUTTON

TAPE DIRECTIONINDICATOR

REWBUTTON PLAY/PROG BUTTON

FF BUTTON

SEEK BUTTONS

TAPEEJECTBUTTON

TAPEEJECTBUTTON

TAPEBUTTON

SKIP BUTTONS

FFBUTTONPLAY/PROG

BUTTON

REW BUTTON NR BUTTON

RPT BUTTON

CASSETTE SLOT

PWR/VOLKNOB

FF BUTTON

SKIP BAR

TAPE DIRECTIONINDICATOR

REW BUTTON

CASSETTE SLOT

PLAY/PROGBUTTON

TAPE BUTTON

NR BUTTONEX MODELwith RES

EX MODEL

LX MODEL

Page 103: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

- -

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). Makesure the open side of the tape isfacing right, then insert the tapemost of the way into the slot. Thesystem will pull the tape in the restof the way, and begin to play it.

The tape direction indicator willcome on to show you which side ofthe tape is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted upward in nowplaying. If you want to play the otherside, press the PLAY/PROG button.When the player reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side.

Dolby noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a tape. The

indicator will light in thedisplay. If the tape was not recordedin Dolby, turn it off by pressing theNR button. Dolby remains off untilyou press the NR button again.

To remove the tape, press theEJECT button. If you want to turnthe player off, press the PWR/VOLknob or turn off the ignition. Thetape will remain in the drive.

When you turn thesystem back on, the tape player willbe in pause mode. Press the PLAY/PROG button to resume play.

To switch to the radio or CD playerwhile a tape is playing, press theAM/FM or CD/CHG (CD/TAPE)button. To change back to the tapeplayer, press the TAPE button.

To rewind the tape,push the REW button. You will seeREW in the display. To fast forwardthe tape, push the FF button. Youwill see FF displayed. Press the FF,REW, or PLAY/PROG button totake the system out of rewind or fastforward.

Press the / ( )buttons to find the beginning of thecurrent song or passage. Press the

/ ( ) buttons to find thebeginning of the next song orpassage. When the system reachesthe beginning of a song or passage, itbegins to play it.

LX Models

Optional on LX models

CONTINUED

Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-Dsymbol are trademarks of Dolby Labora-tories Licensing Corporation.

Playing a Tape

Comfort and Convenience Features

To Play a Tape

To Stop Playing a Tape

Tape Search FunctionsFF/REW

SKIP

99

Page 104: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

- Press the RPT buttonto continuously play a song orpassage. You will see RPT displayed.The track will repeat until you pressthe RPT button again.

The SKIP and REPEATfunctions use silent periods on thetape to find the end of a song orpassage. These features may notwork if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel, or a silent period in the middleof a selection.

The tape player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. Thiscontamination builds up over timeand cause the sound quality todegrade. To prevent this, you shouldclean the player after every 30 hoursof use.

If you do not clean the tape playerregularly, it may eventually becomeimpossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit. Your Honda dealer hasa cleaning kit available.

Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.Tapes longer than that may break orjam the drive.

If the tape is loose, tighten it byturning the hub with a pencil or yourfinger. If the label is peeling off,remove it or it could cause thecassette to jam in the player. Nevertry to insert a warped or damaged

cassette in the player.

Store tapes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace tapes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a tape is exposedto extreme heat or cold, let it reach amoderate temperature beforeinserting it into the player.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the cassette player.

Playing a Tape

REPEAT Caring for the Tape and Player

Comfort and Convenience Features100

NOTE:

Page 105: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

, use the CHbutton to skip to the beginning of thenext track. You will see the CD andtrack number in the display.

, use the CHbutton to advance to the nextselection. You will see ‘‘FF’’ blinkingin the display. The system fastforwards until it senses a silentperiod, then resumes playing.

, use theCH button to go to the next presetstation. You will see the number ofthe preset button in the display. Tochange bands, press the AM/FMbutton.The AM/FM functions change AM,

FM1, FM2, CD, Tape, and DVD/AUX, if available.

The CH button has three functions,depending on whether you arelistening to the radio, playing a tape,or CD.

The middle button adjusts thevolume. Press the top or bottom ofthe button and hold it until thedesired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

If you are playing a CD

If you are playing a tape

If you are listening to the radio

EX Only

Comfort and Convenience Features

Remote Audio Controls

101

CH BUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

VOLUMEBUTTON

Page 106: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code in thepreset buttons. Because there arehundreds of number combinationspossible from five-digits, making thesystem work without knowing theexact code is nearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system code numberand serial number. It is best to storethis card in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in thisOwner’s Manual.

If you should happen to lose the card,you must obtain the code numberfrom a Honda dealer. To do this, youwill need the system’s serial number.

If your vehicle’s battery is discon-nected or goes dead, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘CODE’’ in thefrequency display the next time youturn on the system. Use the presetbuttons to enter the five-digit code.The code is located on the radio codecard included in your Owner’sManual kit. When it is enteredcorrectly, the radio will start playing.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have ten tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in ten attempts, youmust then leave the system on for 1hour before trying again.

If the code card is lost, a Hondadealer can access your code with theyour radio’s serial number. Toaccess the serial number, turn theradio on. It must display ‘‘CODE’’,then turn the radio off. Push thepreset 1, preset 6, and power buttonsat the same time, then quicklyrelease.

You will have to store your favoritestations in the Preset buttons afterthe system begins working. Youroriginal settings were lost when thepower was disconnected.

On EX models

Radio Theft Protection

Comfort and Convenience Features102

Page 107: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Press and hold the CLOCK (SCAN/RPT) button. Change the hours bypressing the H (preset 4) buttonuntil the numbers advance to thedesired time. Change the minutes bypressing the M (preset 5) buttonuntil the numbers advance to thedesired time. When you are finished,release the CLOCK button.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you willneed to set the clock.

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, pressing andholding the clock button, thenpressing the RESET (preset 6)button sets the clock back to theprevious hour. If the displayed timeis after the half hour, the clock setsforward to the beginning of the nexthour.

For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:001:52 will reset to 2:00

The right display shows the timewhen the ignition is in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Press and hold the SET (TUNE)button until the numbers flash.Change the hours by pressing theH ( ) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time. Changethe minutes by pressing the M ( )button until the numbers advance tothe desired time. When you arefinished, press the SET button again.

LX models

EX models

Setting the Clock

Comfort and Convenience Features 103

SETBUTTON

CLOCK

H BUTTON

RESETMHM BUTTON

CLOCK CLOCK BUTTONLX MODEL EX MODEL

Page 108: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Rear Entertainment System

Comfort and Convenience Features104

RR LED

REAR SPEAKERSOFF ICON

RPTBUTTON

PAUSEBUTTON

RDMBUTTON

PLAYBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBUTTONS

REAR POWERBUTTON

REAR CONTROLSELECTOR KNOB

DVD BUTTON

Page 109: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

With this system, the rearpassengers can enjoy a differententertainment source (radio, tapeplayer, CD player, or DVD player)than the front seat occupants. Theaudio is broadcast through thesupplied wireless headphones.

When you turn on the system, therear speakers are automaticallyturned off. You will see the RearSpeakers Off icon in the display. Thesound for the rear system is sent tothe wireless headphones.

If you want to turn the rear speakerson again, press and hold the REARPWR button until the Rear SpeakersOff icon goes off.

To operate the rear entertainmentsystem from the front panel, turn theRR CTRL knob clockwise. Theamber RR LED comes on to showthat the control panel is enabled.

To play the radio or tape, the buttonsfor the front entertainment systemhave the same functions.

If a CD is loaded in the main CDplayer or CD changer, select CD/CHG. If the CD is loaded in thelower player, select DVD/AUX.

If the CD is loaded in the main CDplayer or CD changer, refer to page

for operating instructions. If theCD is loaded in the DVD/AUXplayer, refer to page .

The rear system selects the source itwas last set to. If that source hasbeen removed (the DVD has beenejected from the player, for example),you will see ‘‘_ _ _ _’’ in the display.You must select another source.

Press the REAR PWR button. Toturn on the rear controls (ceilingpanel or remote), press the RRCTRL knob. The system’s iconshows in the right side display. Yourpassengers can then operate the rearsystem with the control panel in theceiling or with the remote control.Press the RR CTRL knob again toturn the rear controls off.

The rear speakers areconnected to the front system, sothey will always play the source thatthe front system is set to.

94

107

Optional on EX models

Rear Entertainment System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Rear Speakers To Select Rear Entertainmentfrom the Front Control Panel

To Turn On the System

105

NOTE:

Page 110: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

- -

-+

Turn the RR CTRL knob clockwise.The amber RR LED will come on toshow that the control panel is nowenabled.

Insert a DVD into the DVD/CDplayer below the front panel.

Press the PLAY button ifthe DVD does not start playingautomatically.

Press the eject button toremove the DVD from the drive.

To return front panel control to thefront audio system, turn the RRCTRL knob counterclockwise.

Each time you press and release the( ) button, the system skipsforward to the next track or chapter.Press and release the ( ) button toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current track or chapter. Press itagain to skip to the beginning of theprevious track or chapter.

Press and hold the( ) button to move forward; you willsee ‘‘CUE’’ in the display. Press andhold the ( ) side to move backward;you will see ‘‘REV’’ in the display.Release the button when the systemreaches the point you want.

Press the PAUSE buttonto pause the DVD. Press the buttonagain or press PLAY to resume.Pause works only with the DVDplayer.

Rear Entertainment System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Operating the DVD Player fromthe Front Control Panel

PLAY EJECT

To Return to Front AudioControls

SEEK/SKIP

PAUSE

106

DVD SLOT DVD EJECTBUTTON

Page 111: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

▼▲

Use these buttons to select theentertainment source (radio, tapeplayer, CD player, or DVD player/Auxiliary device). The selectedsource will be shown in the display.Make sure the rear control operationhas not been disabled with the RRCTRL knob on the front panel.

Use the and buttons toselect from the stations on the rearcontrol panel set to the presetbuttons. Pressing the or

button will cause the system tosearch up or down the band for astation with a strong signal. You willsee SEEK in the display.

On the rear control panel, use thePROG/PLAY button to reverse thetape direction. Press the buttonto skip forward to beginning of thenext song or passage. You will seeFF flashing in the display. Press the

button to skip backward to thebeginning of the current song orpassage. You will see REV flashingin the display.

If a CD is loaded in the main CDplayer or CD changer, select it bypressing the CD/CHG button. If theCD is loaded in the DVD player,press the DVD/AUX button.Press the button to skip to thebeginning of the next track. Pressthe button to return to thebeginning of the current track. If thechanger is selected, use the and

buttons to change discs.

Rear Entertainment System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Using the Rear Control Panel

To Play the Radio from the RearControl Panel

To Play a Tape from the RearControl Panel

To Play a CD from the RearControl Panel

107

REAR CONTROLSOFF BUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBUTTON

CH/DISKBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBUTTON

CH/DISKBUTTONENT BUTTON

PLAY/PAUSE/PROGBUTTON

SOURCESELECTION BUTTONS MENU

BUTTON

Page 112: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

▲▼

The video screen is for use by rearseat passengers only. The driver andfront seat passenger should not tryto view the screen while driving.

Open the overhead screen bypushing the open button. The screenwill swing down partway. Pivot thescreen the rest of the way. If youpivot the screen past the detent, thedisplay will turn off. To close thescreen, pivot it up until it latches.

Pressthis button when you want to pausethe DVD. Press this button again togo back to PLAY.

Press thebutton to skip to the beginning

of the next chapter. Press thebutton to skip back to the

beginning of the current chapter.

To select the menuon the DVD, press the MENUbutton. Use the , , ,and buttons to move to thedesired menu selection, then pressthe ENT button to enter yourselection.

Rear Entertainment System

Comfort and Convenience Features

To Play a DVD from the RearControl Panel

PLAY/PAUSE/PROG

SEEK/SKIP

MENU/ENT

108

Page 113: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

You can use the remote control toselect the entertainment source(radio, tape player, CD player, orDVD player/Auxiliary device). Theselected source will be shown in thedisplay.Make sure the rear control operationhas not been disabled with the RRCTRL knob on the front panel.When using the remote control,point it at the rear control panel inthe ceiling.

The PLAY/PROG, PAUSE, STOP,SKIP, and FWD/REW buttons workthe same function as the front andrear control panel buttons.

The PLAY/PROG, PAUSE, STOP,SKIP, and FWD/REW buttons workthe same as the front and rearcontrol panel buttons.

CONTINUED

Using the Remote Control

To Play a DVD

To Play a Tape, CD, or Radio

Rear Entertainment System

Comfort and Convenience Features 109

SOURCE SELECTIONBUTTONS

REW/FWD BUTTONS

STOP BUTTON

PAUSE BUTTON

PLAY/PROG BUTTON

MENU BUTTON

SUBTITLE BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

ANGLE BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BUTTONS

DISP BUTTON

RETURN (T/C) BUTTON

Page 114: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

- -

▲▼

Some DVDs have menus that allowyou to select a dubbed language,subtitles, a chapter list, previews, etc.The menu contents will vary fromDVD to DVD.

In theMENU selection mode, pressing theRETURN button for less than twoseconds changes the MENU displayto the previous page.Pressing the RETURN button formore than two seconds while a DVDis playing brings the system into theTITLE enter mode. When you enteryour selection, the DVD player willstart playing from the selected title.

To change thecolor, contrast, aspect ratio, andbrightness of the video screen, pressthe DISP button. The current settingof one will be displayed on thescreen each time you press thebutton. Use the and

buttons to change the settingas desired. The display will disappearfrom the screen several secondsafter you stop adjusting the setting.

Many DVDs are recorded withsubtitles or dubbed in multiplelanguages. To select subtitles, pressthe SUBTITLE button. To select adifferent language than the onebeing heard, press the AUDIObutton. Continue to press and

release the SUBTITLE or AUDIObutton to scan through all availablelanguages.

Use the , , , andbuttons to select the desired

menu option. Then press ENT toenter your selection. Use the

and buttons to changepages. You can also use thenumbered buttons to enter the two-digit number of a menu option. Youdo not have to press ENT. Press thebutton again to close the window. On some DVDs,

the scenes are recorded by morethan one camera, giving differentviewpoints of the same scene. Bypressing the ANGLE button, you canselect a different viewpoint.

Rear Entertainment System

Comfort and Convenience Features

MENU and TITLE Buttons RETURN (T/C) Button

DISP Button

SUBTITLES and AUDIO Buttons

ANGLE Button

110

Page 115: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

When you are not using the remotecontrol, store it in its holder in thefront seat pocket.

To replace the batteries in theremote control, press down on thesymbol on the back, then slide thecover off. Remove the old batteries.Make sure the polarity of the newbatteries is correct when you installthem. Slide the cover until it locks.The remote control uses two AAbatteries.

As required by the FCC: This devicecomplies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interferencereceived, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Rear Entertainment System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Storing the Remote Control Replacing the Remote ControlBatteries

111

HOLDER

Page 116: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

There are various types of DVDsavailable. Some of them are notcompatible with your system.The DVD player in your RearEntertainment System can playDVDs and CDs bearing the abovemarks on their packages or jackets.Those packages or jackets shouldalso bear the designation of ‘‘1’’ or‘‘ALL’’. DVD-ROMs cannot be playedin this system.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while operating the DVDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear themessage, take your vehicle to aHonda dealer.

Error Message Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error, or aDVD has been loaded inthe CD player

High Temperature

Low Vehicle BatteryVoltage

Press the EJECT button and pull out the DVD.Check if it is inserted correctly in the DVDPlayer. Make sure the DVD is not scratched ordamaged.Press the EJECT button and pull out the DVD.Check it for damage or deformation. If theDVD cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the DVD isejected, see a Honda dealer. Do not try to forcethe DVD out of the player.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Run the engine to recharge the battery.

DVD Specifications

Comfort and Convenience Features

Playable DVDs DVD Player Error Messages

112

Page 117: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Some state and local governmentagencies prohibit the use ofheadphones by the driver of a motorvehicle. Always obey applicable lawsand regulations.

The audio for the rear entertainmentsystem is sent to the wirelessheadphones that come with thesystem. To turn on the headphones,press the red button on the earpiece.Adjust the volume level with the dialat the bottom of the same earpiece.

To adjust the headphones, slide theearpieces up or down the headband.

For greater battery life, turn off theheadphones when they are not in useby pressing the red button again.They will turn off automatically ifthey do not receive an audio signalfrom the system for several minutes.When not in use, store theheadphones in the pocket on theback of either front seat.

The batteries are under the domedcovers on the back of each earpiece.To remove a cover, press down on itwith your thumb, slide it backward(away from the haedband), then liftit up. Remove the batteries and notetheir polarity. Install the newbatteries in the earpiece with thesame polarity. Set the cover in place,then slide it up until it locks. Eachheadphone uses two AAA batteries.

Rear Entertainment System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Wireless Headphones Replacing Batteries

113

VOLUMEDIAL

COVER

BATTERY

ON/OFF BUTTON

Page 118: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

There are three headphoneconnectors for the third seatpassengers. Each connector has itsown volume control.

V = Video jackL = Left audio jackR = Right audio jack

The system will accept auxiliaryinputs from standard video gamesand video equipment.

Auxiliary input jacks and headphoneconnectors for the rearentertainment system are on theback of the center consolecompartment.

Rear Entertainment System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Auxiliary Input Jacks

114

AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS

HEADPHONE CONNECTORS

VOLUME DIALS

Page 119: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights, and taillights flash ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle. This alarm continues for twominutes, then the system resets. Toreset an alarm system before the twominutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s front door with the key orthe remote transmitter.

Once the security system is set,opening any door without using thekey or the remote transmitter, or thehood, will cause it to alarm. It alsoalarms if the radio is removed fromthe dashboard or the wiring is cut.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, the tailgate, or any door isnot fully closed. If the system will notset, check the Door and TailgateOpen Monitor on the instrumentpanel (see page ) to see if thedoors and the tailgate are fullyclosed. Since it is not part of themonitor display, manually check thehood.

The security system automaticallysets fifteen seconds after you lockthe doors, hood, and the tailgate. Forthe system to activate, you must lockthe doors from the outside with thekey or remote transmitter. Thesecurity system light starts blinkingimmediately to show you the systemis setting itself.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

50

On EX models

Comfort and Convenience Features

Security System

115

SECURITY SYSTEM LIGHT

Page 120: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Push in the Cruise Control MasterSwitch. The indicator in the switchwill come on.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The indicator on theinstrument panel comes on toshow the system is now activated.

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down. This will cancel thecruise control. To resume the setspeed, press the RESUME/ACCELbutton. The indicator on theinstrument panel will come back on.

1.

2.

3.

Cruise Control

Comfort and Convenience Features

Using the Cruise Control

116

CRUISE CONTROL MASTER SWITCH RESUME/ACCEL

CANCEL

SET/DECEL

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

Page 121: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RESUME/ACCEL button. When you reachthe desired cruising speed, releasethe button.

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the SET/DECELbutton.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RESUME/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake pedal lightly withyour foot. The CRUISECONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake pedalwill cause the cruise control tocancel.

You can cancel the cruise control inany of these ways:

Tap the brake pedal.Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.Press the Cruise Control MasterSwitch.

Pressing the Cruise Control MasterSwitch turns the system off anderases the previous cruising speed.

When you push the CANCEL buttonor tap on the brake pedal, the systemwill remember the previously setcruising speed. To return to thatspeed, accelerate to above 25 mph(40 km/h) and then press andrelease the RESUME/ACCELbutton. The CRUISE CONTROLlight comes on. The vehicle willaccelerate to the same cruisingspeed as before.

Cruise Control

Comfort and Convenience Features

Changing the Set Speed Cancelling the Cruise Control

Resuming the Set Speed

117

Page 122: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

The HomeLink UniversalTransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remote controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, youshould unplug the motor for thatdevice during training. Repeatedlypressing the remote control buttoncould burn out the motor.The HomeLink Transceiver storesthe code in a permanent memory.There should be no need to retrainHomeLink if your vehicle’s batterygoes dead or is disconnected.If your garage door opener wasmanufactured before April 1982, youmay not be able to programHomeLink to operate it. They do nothave the safety feature that causes

the motor to stop and reverse if anobstacle is detected during closing,increasing the risk of injury.

Always refer to the openinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with the HomeLinkUniversal Transceiver. If you do nothave this information, contact themanufacturer of the equipment.

If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button. To do this,press and hold the two outsidebuttons on HomeLink Transceiverfor about 20 seconds, or until the redlight flashes. Release the buttons,then proceed to Step 1.

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to Step 1.

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the house current.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote control 2 to 5inches from HomeLink. Makesure you are not blocking yourview of the red light in HomeLink.

2.

1.

On EX Models

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Comfort and Convenience Features

General Information

Important Safety Precautions

Training HomeLinkBefore you begin

118

Page 123: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Press and hold the remote controlbutton and one of the HomeLinkbuttons at the same time.

The remotecontrol you are training from maystop transmitting after twoseconds. This is not long enoughfor HomeLink to learn the code.Release and press the button onthe remote control every twoseconds until HomeLink haslearned the code.

The red light in HomeLink shouldbegin flashing. It will flash slowlyat first, then rapidly.

When the red light flashes rapidly,release both buttons. HomeLinkshould have learned the code fromthe remote control.

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinkTransceiver button by pushing it.If the button does not work, repeatthe procedure to train it again. If itstill does not work, you may have avariable or rolling code garagedoor opener. See if you do bypressing and holding theHomeLink transceiver button youjust trained. If the red light blinksfor two seconds, then stays on,you have a rolling code garagedoor opener. Go to ‘‘Training Witha Rolling Code System’’ (see page

).

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other remotely-controlled devices around yourhome (lighting, automatic gate,security system, etc.).

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

120

Canadian Owners:

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Comfort and Convenience Features 119

Page 124: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so they send andreceive the correct codes.

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer.

Press the Training button on thegarage door opener unit until thelight next to the button comes on,then release it. The light may blink,or come on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 4 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 4 seconds.

This should turn off the traininglight on the garage door openerunit. (Some systems may requireyou to press the button up to threetimes.)

Press the HomeLink button again.It should operate the garage door.

To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the red lightbegins to flash, then release thebuttons.You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.

To train an already programmedtransceiver button with a new device,you do not have to erase all thememory. Train the selected buttonover the existing memory codefollowing the steps under

.

6.

2.4.

5.

1.

3.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Comfort and Convenience Features

Training With a Rolling CodeSystem

Erasing Codes

Retraining a Button

TrainingHomeLink

120

TRAINING BUTTON

Page 125: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Universal Transceiver,or would like information on homeproducts that can be operated by thetransmitter, call (800) 355-3515. Onthe Internet, go to www.homelink.com.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Comfort and Convenience Features

Customer Assistance

121

Page 126: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

122

Page 127: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Before you begin driving your Honda,you should know what gasoline touse, and how to check the levels ofimportant fluids. You also need toknow how to properly store luggageor packages. The information in thissection will help you. If you plan toadd any accessories to your vehicle,please read the information in thissection first.

.............................Break-in Period . 124.................Fuel Recommendation . 124

.........Service Station Procedures . 125...............................Fuel Economy . 128

...Accessories and Modifications . 129.............................Carrying Cargo . 131

Before Driving

Before Driving 123

Page 128: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not tow a trailer.

You should also follow these re-commendations with an overhauledor exchanged engine, or when thebrakes are replaced.

We recommend using gasolinecontaining detergent additives thathelp prevent fuel system and enginedeposits.

Your Honda is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 86 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causeoccasional metallic knocking noisesin the engine and will result indecreased engine performance.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the Malfunction IndicatorLamp on your instrument panel to

come on. If this happens, contactyour authorized Honda dealer forservice.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10 percent ethanolby volume and up to 15 percentMTBE by volume. Do not usegasoline containing methanol.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Premium fuel is recommended whentowing in certain conditions (seepage ).152

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Quick Start Guide

Before Driving124

Page 129: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Park with the driver’s side closestto the gas pump.

Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Place the cap in the holder on thefuel fill door.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least three times.If you do not properly tighten thecap, the Malfunction IndicatorLamp may come on (see page

).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapors from going into theatmosphere. Consult your dealer.

1.

2.

3.

4.5.

6.

207If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving

Refueling

125

Pull

FUEL FILL CAP

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine and keepheat, sparks, and flamesaway.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

Page 130: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood to the left of thecenter. Slide you hand to the leftuntil you feel the hood latchhandle. Push this handle up torelease it. Lift up the hood.

If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

Pull the support rod out of its clip,and insert the end into the hole atthe center of the hood or the holeon the left side of the hood.

Lift it up slightly to remove thesupport rod from the hole. Put thesupport rod back into its holding clip.Lower the hood to about a foot (30cm) above the fender, then let itdrop. Make sure it is securelylatched.3.2.

1.

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving

Opening the Hood To Close the Hood

126

LATCH SUPPORT RODCLIP

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

Page 131: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back into itstube.

Remove the dipstick again andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

on checking other items in yourHonda.

1.

2.

3.

4.

163

174

171

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving

Oil Check

Adding Oil

Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

127

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

MAX

MIN

RESERVE TANK

DIPSTICK

Page 132: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Try to maintain a constant speed.Every time you slow down andspeed up, your vehicle uses extrafuel. Use the cruise control whenappropriate.

Combine several short trips intoone.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Use the fresh-airventilation when possible.

Always maintain your vehicleaccording to the maintenanceschedule. See

(see page).

an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses fuel.

The build-up of snow or mud onyour vehicle’s underside addsweight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fuelmileage and reduces the chance ofcorrosion.

Drive moderately. Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering andhard braking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gearpossible.

163

For example,

Fuel Economy

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Before Driving128

Page 133: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas the SRS and anti-lock brakesystem.

Before installing any accessory:Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withproper operation.

Have the installer contact yourHonda dealer for assistance beforeinstalling any electronic accessory.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake your vehicle unsafe. Beforeyou make any modifications or addany accessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

Although aftermarket accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability. (See‘‘Modifications’’ on page foradditional information.)

130

212Accessories

Before Driving

Accessories and Modifications

129

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

Page 134: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components with non-Honda (aftermarket) componentscould seriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Some examples are:

Lowering your vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Aftermarket wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents.

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Do not modify your steering wheelor any other part of yourSupplemental Restraint System.Modifications could make thesystem ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your Honda dealer.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top the dashboard, and frontseat back could interfere with theproper operation of the airbags. Or,if the airbags inflate, the objectscould be propelled inside thevehicle and hurt someone.

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thevehicle and hurt someone.

This could prevent theairbag from inflating properly.

Before Driving

Modifying Your Vehicle Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attach or place objects onthe airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door.

Do not place any objects over orreplace the outside edge of a frontseat-back.

Accessories and Modifications

130

Page 135: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove boxDoor and seat-back pocketsRear cargo area, including thesecond and third row seats whenfolded flatRoof-rack (if installed)

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving 131

GLOVE BOX DOOR POCKET

SEAT-BACK POCKET

CARGO AREA

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

Page 136: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

×

The maximum load for your vehicleis 1,323 lbs (600 kg). This figureincludes the total weight of alloccupants, cargo, accessories, andthe tongue weight if you are towing atrailer.

To determine the correct cargo andluggage load limit:

Locate the statement, ‘‘thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 1,323lbs (600 kg)’’ on your vehicle’splacard (on the driver’s doorjamb).

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in the vehicle. (Eightis seating capacity of your vehicle.)

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from1,323 lbs (600 kg).

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, the load from your trailerwill be transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

For example, if there will be five 150lbs (70 kg) occupants in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 573 lbs (250kg).5 150 lbs (70 kg) = 750 lbs (350kg)1,323 lbs (600 kg) 750 lbs (350 kg)= 573 lbs (250 kg)

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity.

Determine the combined weightof accessories, luggage, and cargobeing loaded in the vehicle. Theweight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in step 4 [573lbs (250 kg) in this example].

The total weight must not exceedthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The load for the front andrear axles also must not exceed theGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)(see page ).

The separation net can be used tohold back soft lightweight itemsstored in the cargo area. Heavyitems should be properly secured onthe floor of the cargo area.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

148

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving

Optional Separation Net

132

Page 137: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the cargo area, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thetailgate, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed 165 lbs (75 kg).

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the information that

came with your roof rack.

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe pedals or seat operation.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

The cargo cover can be used overthe cargo area behind the third rowseats. When the third row seats arefolded down, the cargo cover can beinstalled in a forward position andextended over the larger cargo area.

The hooks on each side of thetailgate and on the underside of thecargo area storage compartment lidare for plastic grocery bags. To usethe hook on the storagecompartment lid, open the lid, andattach the cord to one of the shaftsof the third seat center headrestraint.

The hook on the rearof the console compartment is forplastic grocery bags.

42

On LX model

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving

Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Areaor on a Roof Rack

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Optional Cargo Cover

133

Page 138: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

134

Page 139: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate theautomatic transmission. It alsoincludes important information onparking your vehicle, the brakingsystem, the VTM-4 System, andfacts you need if you are planning totow a trailer.

........................Driving Guidelines . 136.......................Starting the Engine . 137

..............Automatic Transmission . 138..............................VTM-4 System . 142

..................................Parking Tips . 143.............................Braking System . 144

...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 145...........................Towing a Trailer . 147

......................Trailer Driving Tips . 152Towing Your Vehicle Behind a

................................Motorhome . 154Off-Highway Driving

..................................Guidelines . 155

Driving

Driving 135

Page 140: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Your vehicle has a higher groundclearance that allows you to travelover bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides goodvisibility so you can anticipateproblems earlier.

Because your vehicle rides higheroff the ground, it has a high centerof gravity that can cause it to rollover if you make abrupt turns. Utilityvehicles have a significantly higherroll over rate than other types ofvehicles.

To prevent rollovers or loss ofcontrol:

Take corners at slower speedsthan you would with a passengervehicle.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers whenever possible.

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicator lights inthe instrument panel (see page

).

Make sure the doors and thetailgate are securely closed andlocked.

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Do not carry heavy cargo on theroof.

Do not modify your vehicle in anyway that would raise the center ofgravity.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

3.

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

61

74

68

12

47

See page for additional driving off-highway guidelines.

155

Driving Guidelines

Driving

Preparing to Drive

136

Page 141: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in START for more than15 seconds at a time. If the enginedoes not start right away, pausefor at least 10 seconds beforetrying again.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 5.

5.

6.1.

2.

3.

4.

Starting the Engine

Driving 137

NOTICE: The engine is harder to startin cold weather. Also, the thinner airf ound at altitudes above 8,000 f eet(2,400 meters) adds to this problem.

Page 142: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem in theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration andhave the transmission checked by aHonda dealer as soon as possible.

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). If itflashes while driving (in any shiftposition), it indicates a possibleproblem in the transmission.

To shift from any position, pull thelever toward you. You cannot shiftout of Park when the ignition switchis in the LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY(I) positions.

Automatic Transmission

Driving

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

138

SHIFT LEVER

Page 143: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

To shift from:

P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to DD to DD to ND to DN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpull the shift lever towardsyou.

Pull the shift lever towardsyou.

Move the lever.

3

3

3

3

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. The shift lever must be inPark before you can remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

Press the brakepedal and pull the shift lever towardsyou to shift from Park to Reverse. Toshift from Reverse to Natural, cometo a complete stop and then shift.

Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from Neutral toanother gear.

Use this position foryour normal driving. The transmis-sion automatically selects a suitablegear for your speed and acceleration.You may notice the transmissionshifting up at higher speeds whenthe engine is cold. This helps theengine warm up faster.

141

CONTINUED

Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

Drive (D)

Automatic Transmission

Driving 139

Page 144: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

This position issimilar to D, except only the firstthree gears are selected. Use Dwhen towing a trailer in hilly terrain,or to provide engine braking whengoing down a steep hill. D can alsokeep the transmission from cyclingbetween third and fourth gear instop-and-go driving.

This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop.

Use Second gear:

For more power when climbing.

To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.

For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.

To help reduce wheel spin.

When driving downhill with atrailer.

This position locks, thetransmission locks in first gear. Byupshifting and downshifting through1, 2, D , and D, you can operate thetransmission much like a manualtransmission without a clutch pedal.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

3

33

Drive (D )

Second (2)

First (1)

Engine Speed Limiter3

Automatic Transmission

Driving140

Page 145: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Do this if pushing on the brake pedaland pulling the shift lever does notshift the transmission out of Park:

Set the Parking brake.

If you need to use the Shift LockRelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by a Honda dealer.

Put a cloth on the edge of the ShiftLock Release slot cover. Using akey, carefully pry on the edge ofthe cover to remove it.

Make sure the key is in theignition switch LOCK (0) position.

Insert the key in the Shift LockRelease slot.

Push down on the key while youpull the shift lever towards youand move it out of Park to Neutral.

Remove the key from the ShiftLock Release slot, then install thecover. Press the brake pedal, andrestart the engine.

3.

4.

5.

6.

1.

2.

Shift Lock Release

Automatic Transmission

Driving 141

Page 146: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

The Variable Torque Management4WD System (VTM-4) automaticallytransfers varying amounts of enginetorque to the rear wheels underlower traction conditions.

If more traction is needed when yourvehicle is stuck, or is likely tobecome stuck, you can use theVTM-4 Lock button to increasetorque to the rear wheels.

The vehicle must be stopped withthe engine running.

Move the shift lever to First (1),Second (2), or Reverse (R) gear.

Press the VTM-4 Lock button.The light in the button will comeon.

To get unstuck, apply light pressureto the accelerator pedal. Do not spinthe front tires for more than a fewseconds. Because of the amount oftorque applied to the rear tires, theyshould not spin. This is normal. Ifyou are not able to move the vehicle,stop and reverse direction.

doone of the following:

Press the VTM-4 Lock button.

Move the shift lever to D or D .

Turn the ignition to LOCK (0).

The VTM-4 Lock will temporarilydisengage when the vehicle speedexceeds 18 mph (30 km/h). It willautomatically engage again as thespeed slows below 18 mph (30km/h). The button light will remainon.

1.

2.

3.

3

To Engage the VTM-4 Lock To Disengage the VTM-4 Lock,

VTM-4 System

Driving142

NOTICE:

NOTICE:

Do not use the VTM-4 Lockbutton on dry, paved roads. Driving ondry, paved roads with VTM-4 Lock ONmay damage the rear dif f erential whenmaking a turn. Strange noise andvibration can also result.

Do not continually spin thef ront tires of your vehicle.Continuously spinning the f ront tirescan cause transmission or reardif f erential damage.

Page 147: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly oryour vehicle may roll if it is on anincline.

Set the parking brake before you putthe transmission in Park. This keepsthe vehicle from moving and puttingpressure on the parking mechanismin the transmission.

Make sure the windows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.in the cargo area, or take themwith you.

Lock the doors.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Parking Tips

Parking Tips

Driving 143

Page 148: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Your Honda is equipped with discbrakes on all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The ABS helpsyou retain steering control whenbraking very hard.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, and reduces their effectiveness.It also keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

Braking System Braking System Design

Driving

Braking System

144

Front

Page 149: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)helps prevent the brakes fromlocking up and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The ABS also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution accordingto vehicle loading.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

this defeats the purpose of the ABS.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal as you steer away fromthe hazard. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

You should never pump the brake pedal;

Driving

Brake Wear Indicators Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Activating the Anti-lock Brakes

Braking System, Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

145

ABS INDICATOR

U.S. indicator shown

Page 150: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

If the ABS indicator comes on, theanti-lock function of the brakingsystem has shut down. The brakesstill work like a conventional system,but without anti-lock. You shouldhave the dealer inspect your vehicleas soon as possible.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the front-to-rear brakingdistribution system may also be shutdown.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your Honda dealer assoon as possible. Avoid sudden hardbraking which could cause the rearwheels to lock up and possibly leadto a loss of control.

It only helps with thesteering control during braking.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.

208

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Driving

ABS IndicatorABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

Important Safety Reminders

146

Page 151: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

To safely tow a trailer, you shouldobserve the load limits, use theproper equipment, and follow theguidelines in this section.

Be sure to read theon page

if you plan to tow off pavedsurfaces.

The total trailer weight and tongueload vary depending on the numberof occupants in your vehicle and thetype of trailer being towed.

See page for limits for yourtowing situation. Towing a load thatis too heavy can seriously affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance.

The weight that the tongue of a fullyloaded trailer puts on the hitchshould be 5 to 10 percent of the totaltrailer weight for boat trailers, and 8to 15 percent of total trailer weightfor all other trailers. See page forlimits for your towing situation.

Too much tongue load reduces front-tire traction and steering control.Too little tongue load can make thetrailer unstable and cause it to sway.

150150

155

Driving Off-Highway Guidelines section

CONTINUED

Load Limits

Total Trailer Weight

Tongue Load

Driving

Towing a Trailer

147

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

Page 152: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

The best way to confirm that allloads are within limits is to checkthem at a public scale.

To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,or if you cannot get to a public scale,we recommend that you estimateyour total trailer weight and tongueload as described next.

Add the weight of your trailer (asquoted by the manufacturer) witheverything in or on the trailer. Checkthe tables on page that you donot exceed the limit for yourconditions.

The maximumallowable weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo and the tongueload is 5,950 lbs (2,700 kg).

The maximumallowable weight on the vehicle axlesare 2,865 lbs (1,300 kg) on the frontaxle, and 3,155 lbs (1,430 kg) on therear axle.

The maximumallowable weight of the fully loadedvehicle and trailer is 9,700 lbs (4,410kg) with the proper hitch and fluidcoolers (see page ).

The GCWR must be reduced 2percent for every 1,000 feet (305meters) of elevation.

150

151

Estimating LoadsGross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR)

Gross Axle Weight Ratings(GAWR)

Gross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR)

To Estimate the Total Trailer Weight

Driving

Towing a Trailer

148

Page 153: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Park the vehicle on level ground.

Measure and record the distancefrom the ground to the bottom ofthe trailer hitch.

Connect the fully loaded trailer tothe hitch.

Measure again from the ground tothe same spot on the bottom of thehitch.

Subtract the second measurementfrom the first measurement. Referto Fig. 1.

If the difference is:1’’ = 150 lbs (68 kg)

1 ¾’’ = 250 lbs (114 kg)2 ½’’ = 350 lbs (160 kg)

3’’ = 450 lbs (205 kg)3 ¼’’ = over 450 lbs (205 kg)

If the difference is more than3 ¼’’ you have too much tongueload at the rear. Move orremove cargo from the trailerand the vehicle and measureagain.

If the estimated trailer weight andtongue load do not exceed the limits,drive your trailer to a public scalefully loaded with all occupants andcargo you plan to take on the road.

If your trailer lights burn out, checkto see if there are any blown fuses(see page ).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

211

CONTINUED

To Estimate the Tongue Load

Fig. 1

Driving

Towing a Trailer

Trailer Lights

149

Page 154: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Number ofOccupants

2345678

Max. Trailer Weight Max. Tongue Load

Number ofOccupants

2345678

Max. Trailer Weight Max. Tongue Load

Equipped with transmission cooler and power steering fluid cooler.

Towing is Not Recommended

Equipped with transmission cooler and power steering fluid cooler.

Towing is Not Recommended

Towing a Trailer

Driving150

Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Limits:BOAT TRAILERS

OTHER TYPES OF TRAILERS

The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (70 kg) and each has 15 lbs (7 kg)

of luggage in the cargo area.

4,500 lbs (2,045 kg)4,500 lbs (2,045 kg)4,500 lbs (2,045 kg)4,300 lbs (1,945 kg)4,100 lbs (1,855 kg)2,000 lbs (905 kg)

450 lbs (205 kg)450 lbs (205 kg)450 lbs (205 kg)350 lbs (160 kg)220 lbs (100 kg)100 lbs (45 kg)

3,500 lbs (1,590 kg)3,500 lbs (1,590 kg)3,300 lbs (1,490 kg)3,100 lbs (1,400 kg)2,700 lbs (1,220 kg)1,200 lbs (540 kg)

450 lbs (205 kg)450 lbs (205 kg)450 lbs (205 kg)350 lbs (160 kg)220 lbs (100 kg)100 lbs (45 kg)

Page 155: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Towing generally requires a varietyof supplemental equipment. Toensure the best quality, werecommend that you purchaseHonda equipment whenever possible.

Discuss any additional needs withyour trailer sales or rental agency,and make sure all equipment isproperly installed, maintained, andalso meets state regulations.

We strongly recommend that youhave your Honda dealer install aHonda hitch and use the requiredfluid coolers. Using non-Hondaequipment may result in seriousdamage to your vehicle.

A weight distributing hitch is notrecommended for use with your Pilot.

Honda requires that any trailer witha total trailer weight of 1,000 lbs (455kg) or more have its own brakes.

There are two common types oftrailer brakes: surge and electric.Surge brakes are common for boattrailers, since the brakes will get wet.

Electric brakes must beelectronically actuated. Do notattempt to tap into your vehicle’shydraulic system. See your brakemanufacturer for more informationon installing electric brakes.

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let the

chains drag on the ground.

To help prevent overheating, aheavy-duty transmission fluid coolerand a heavy-duty power steeringfluid cooler are required for trailertowing. These coolers are availableonly from your Honda dealer.

This device is recommended if yourtrailer tends to sway. Your trailermaker can tell you what kind of swaycontrol you need and how to install it.

Many states and provinces requirespecial exterior mirrors when towinga trailer. Even if they don’t, youshould install special mirrors if youcannot clearly see behind you, or ifthe trailer creates a blind spot.

CONTINUED

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Hitch

Weight Distributing Hitch

Trailer Brakes

Safety Chains

Transmission Fluid Cooler andPower Steering Fluid Cooler

Sway Control

Trailer Mirrors

Towing a Trailer

Driving 151

Page 156: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Check trailer light requirements forthe areas where you plan to tow.

To get to your vehicle’s trailerlighting connector, open the tailgate,remove the cargo cover, thenremove the rear panel trim. Theconnector is on the left side. Werecommend that you have yourHonda dealer install a Honda wiringharness and converter.

If you use a non-Honda trailerlighting harness and converter, youcan get the mating connector andpins that mate with the connector inyour vehicle from your Honda dealer.

When towing a trailer, werecommend that you carry a full-sizespare wheel and tire for your vehicleand trailer. See page for propertire size, page for how to store afull size wheel and tire, and page

for information on changing aflat tire.

Remember to unhitch the trailerbefore changing a flat. Ask yourtrailer sales or rental agency whereand how to store the trailer’s sparetire.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.

Towing performance can beaffected by high altitude, hightemperature, or when climbingsteep grades. Therefore, premiumfuel is recommended when towingmore than 3,500 lbs (1,590 kg).

Avoid towing a trailer during yourvehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km).

Drive slower than normal in alldriving conditions.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer has asmaller arc and it can hit or runover something the vehicle misses.

191

197

200

Trailer Lights

Spare Tires

Towing a Trailer, Trailer Driving Tips

Driving

Driving Safely With a Trailer

152

GROUND(BLACK)

BACK-UP LIGHT(GREEN/BLACK)

LEFT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/WHITE)

RIGHT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/YELLOW)

BRAKE LIGHT(WHITE/BLACK)

TAILLIGHT(RED/BLACK)

Connector-98530-00006-00Terminal Kit-07JAZ-001-030A

Page 157: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Allow more time and distance forbraking. Do not brake or turnsuddenly the trailer couldjackknife or turn over.

When driving with a fix-sided (e.g.camper, utility) trailer, do notexceed 55 mph (88 km/h). Athigher speeds, the trailer maysway or affect vehicle handling.

When being passed by a truck orlarge vehicle, cross-winds and airturbulence can disrupt yoursteering and cause your trailer tosway. Keep a constant speed, steerstraight ahead, and do not try tomake quick steering or brakingcorrections.

Do not park on an incline unless itis unavoidable. If you must, turnthe vehicle’s wheels toward thecurb on a downhill or away fromthe curb on an uphill. Afterparking, place wheel chocks ateach trailer tire on the downhillside.

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

If the vehicle’s wheels slip whenretrieving a boat from the water,shift to first gear, and turn on VTM-4Lock (see page ). DisengageVTM-4 Lock as soon as the boat isout of the water to prevent damageto the VTM-4 system.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, reduce speedand, if necessary, pull to the side ofthe road and let the engine cool.

If the transmission shifts frequentlywhile going up a hill, shift down onegear.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or the parkingbrake. Do not try to hold the vehiclein place by pressing on theaccelerator; this could cause theautomatic transmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and shift down to D . Donot ‘‘ride’’ the brakes.

142

bottom

3

Backing Up

Retrieving a Boat

Driving on Hills

Trailer Driving Tips

Driving

Remember: It will take longer toslow down and stop when towinga trailer.

153

Page 158: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Your Pilot can be towed behind amotorhome at legal highway speedsup to 65 mph (100 km/h). Do notexceed 65 mph (100 km/h) or severetransmission damage will occur. Toavoid damage to the 4WD system, itmust be towed with all four wheelson the ground (flat towing).

When purchasing a tow bar, makesure you select a reputablemanufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s attachmentinstructions carefully.

Perform the following procedureeveryday immediately before youbegin towing. Otherwise severeautomatic transmission damage willoccur.

Check the transmission fluid level(see page ).

Start the engine.

Press on the brake pedal. Movethe shift lever through all itspositions.

Shift to D, then to N. Let theengine run for three minutes, thenturn it off.

Release the parking brake.

Leave the ignition switch inACCESSORY (I) so the steeringwheel does not lock. Make surethe radio and any items pluggedinto the accessory powersockets are turned off so you donot run down the battery.

If you tow more than 8 hours in oneday, you should repeat the aboveprocedure at least every 8 hours(when you stop for fuel, etc.)

176 Do not overfill.

Extended Towing

Driving

Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome

154

NOTICE:

NOTICE:

Improper towing preparationwill damage the transmission. Followthe above procedure exactly. If youcannot shif t the transmission or startthe engine, your vehicle must betransported on a f lat-bed or trailer.

The steering system can bedamaged if the steering wheel is locked.Leave the ignition switch inACCESSORY (I), and make sure thesteering wheel turns f reely bef ore youbegin towing.

Page 159: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily for use on pavement. Butits higher ground clearance and four-wheel drive VTM-4 system allow youto occasionally travel on unpavedroads, to campgrounds, picnic sites,and similar locations. It is notdesigned for trailblazing, mountainclimbing, or other challenging off-road activities.

If you decide to drive on unpavedroads, you will find that it requiressomewhat different driving skills.Your vehicle will also handlesomewhat differently than it does onpavement. Be sure to pay extraattention to the precautions and tipsin this section, and get acquaintedwith your vehicle before leaving thepavement.

To avoid loss of control or rollover,be sure to follow all precautions andrecommendations.

Be sure to store cargo properlyand do not exceed your vehiclecargo load limits (see pages

and ).

Wherever you drive, make sureyou and your passengers alwayswear seat belts.

Keep your speed low, and nevergo faster than the conditionsallow.

It’s up to you to continually assessthe situation and drive within thelimits.

132 147

Important Safety Precautions

Driving

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

155

Improperly operating thisvehicle on or off-pavement cancause an accident or rollover inwhich you and your passengerscould be seriously injured orkilled.

Follow all instructions andguidelines in the owner’smanual.Keep your speed low anddon’t drive faster thanconditions permit.

Page 160: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Before you leave the pavement, besure to do all scheduled maintenanceand service and that you inspect yourvehicle. Pay special attention to thecondition of the tires and check thetire pressure.

After you return to the pavement,carefully inspect your vehicle tomake sure there is no damage thatcould make driving it unsafe.Recheck the condition of the tiresand the tire pressure.

The route presents limits (too steepor bumpy roads). You have limits(driving skill and comfort). And yourvehicle has limits (traction, stability,and power).

Driving off-highway can behazardous if you fail to recognizelimits and take the properprecautions.

For better traction on all surfaces,accelerate slowly and gradually buildup speed. If you try to start too faston wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, youmight not have enough traction toget underway and you may digyourself a hole. Starting with theshift lever in second gear (2) willhelp you have a smoother start onsnow and ice.

Debris in the road can damage yoursuspension or other components.Because your vehicle has a highcenter of gravity, driving over a largeobstacle, or allowing a wheel to dropinto a deep hole can cause yourvehicle to tip or roll over.

If you can’t clearly see all roadconditions or obstacles, walk theslope before you drive on it. If youhave any doubt whether or not youcan safely drive on the slope, don’tdo it. Find another route.

If you are driving up a hill and findthat you cannot continue,

. Your vehicle could rollover. Slowly back down the hill,following the same route you took upthe hill.

Keep in mind that you will usuallyneed more time and distance tobrake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.Avoid hard braking. Do not pumpthe brakes; let the anti-lock brakingsystem pump them for you.

do not try toturn around

Check Out Your Vehicle

Remember:

Accelerating and Braking Avoiding Obstacles

Driving on Slopes

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Driving156

Page 161: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

If you get stuck, engage the VTM-4Lock (see page ). Carefully try togo in the direction (forward orreverse) that you think will get youunstuck. Do not spin the tires at highspeeds. It will not help you get outand may cause damage to thetransmission or VTM-4 system.

If you are unable to free yourself,your vehicle is equipped with frontand rear tow hooks designed for thispurpose.

Use a nylon strap to attach the Pilotto the recovery vehicle and carefullytake out the slack in the strap. Oncethe strap is tight, the recoveryvehicle should apply force.Remember that the recovery vehicleneeds good traction to avoidbecoming stuck, too.

Before driving through water, stopand make sure that:

The water is not deep enough tocover your wheel hubs, axles orexhaust pipe. You could stall andnot be able to restart your engine.The water can also damageimportant vehicle components.

The banks are sloped so you candrive out.

The water is not flowing too fast.Deep rushing water can sweep youdownstream. Even very shallowrushing water can wash theground from under your tires andcause you to lose traction andpossibly roll over.

The banks and surface under thewater provide good traction. Thewater may hide hazards such asrocks, holes, or mud.

If you decide it is safe to drivethrough water, choose a suitablespeed and engage the VTM-4 Lock.Proceed without shifting or changingspeeds, and do not stop the vehicleor shut off the engine.

After driving through water, testyour brakes. If they got wet, gentlypump them while driving slowly untilthey operate normally.

If the water is deeper than the wheelhubs, some additional service maybe required. This service is notcovered by your warranties.

142

CONTINUED

If You Get StuckCrossing a Stream

Driving

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

157

Page 162: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

You should never use a jack to try toget unstuck. Your vehicle couldeasily slip off the jack and hurt youor someone else.

You may be able to safely tow alightweight trailer (such as amotorcycle or small tent trailer) off-road if you follow these guidelines.

Do not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg)or a tongue weight of 100 lbs (45kg).

Try to stay on smooth, level dirtroads, and avoid driving in hillyterrain.

Allow extra room for starting,stopping, and turning.

Slow down if you encounter bumpsor other obstacles.

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Driving

Towing a Trailer Off-Road

158

Page 163: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

This section also includesMaintenance Schedules for normaldriving and severe driving conditions,a Maintenance Record, and instruc-tions for simple maintenance tasksyou may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools to per-form more complex maintenancetasks on your Honda, you may wantto purchase the Service Manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your Hondadealer.

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

......................Maintenance Safety . 160.................Maintenance Schedule . 161

....................Maintenance Record . 167..............................Fluid Locations . 170

........................Adding Engine Oil . 171.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 172

..............................Engine Coolant . 174....................Windshield Washers . 175

.....Automatic Transmission Fluid .176...............................Differential Oil .177

....................................Timing Belt . 177

....................................Brake Fluid . 178....................Power Steering Fluid . 179

.............................................Lights . 180.....................................Floor Mats . 185

.......................Cleaning Seat Belts . 185.................................Wiper Blades . 186

...............................................Tires . 188................Checking Your Battery . 193

.............................Vehicle Storage . 194

233

Maintenance

Maintenance 159

Page 164: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when working

with the battery or compressed air.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by aHonda technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance

Important Safety Precautions

Potential Vehicle HazardsCarbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

160

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations, andschedules in this owner’smanual.

Page 165: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions if you drive your vehicleMAINLY under one or more of thefollowing conditions.

Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)per trip or, in freezingtemperatures, driving less than 10miles (16 km) per trip.

Driving in extremely hot [over90°F (32°C)] conditions.

Used primarily as a deliveryvehicle or taxi that is drivenmostly in stop-and-go traffic and/or parked with the engine idling.

Service your vehicle according to thetime and mileage periods on one ofthe Maintenance Schedules on thefollowing pages.

Always use unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating (see page

).

Drive your vehicle regularly over adistance of several miles(kilometers).

Operate your vehicle onreasonable roads within the legalspeed limit.

Avoid exceeding your vehicle’sload limit. This puts excess stresson the engine, brakes, and manyother vehicle parts. The load limitis shown on the tire informationlabel on the driver’s doorjamb.

The maintenance schedule assumesyou will use your vehicle as normaltransportation for passengers andtheir possessions. You should alsofollow these recommendation:

Trailer towing, driving with a rooftop carrier, or driving inmountainous conditions.

Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions.

NOTE: If you onlydrive under a ‘‘severe’’ condition, youshould follow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule.

112

OCCASIONALLY

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Which Schedule to Follow

U.S. Owners

Maintenance Schedule

Canadian Owners

161

Page 166: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orskilled person to keep yourwarranties in effect. Keep all thereceipts as proof of completion, andhave the person who does the workfill out the Maintenance Record.Check your warranty booklet formore information.

We recommend the use of Hondaparts and fluids whenever you havemaintenance done.

Maintenance,replacement, or repair of emissionscontrol devices and systems may bedone by any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPAstandards.

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, Hondarecommends that all maintenanceservices be performed at therecommended time or mileageperiod to ensure long-term reliability.

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Servicing Your Vehicle

U.S. Vehicles:

162

Page 167: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See pages

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

171

174

176 177

178

188

180

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

163

Page 168: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

* *

Follow the Normal MaintenanceSchedule if the severe drivingconditions specified in the SevereConditions Maintenance Schedule onthe next page do not apply.

NOTE: If you only OCCASIONALLYdrive under a ‘‘severe’’ condition, youshould follow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule.

Maintenance164

Check engine oil and coolantCheck tiresReplace engine oil

Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 190 )Replace engine oil filterCheck front and rear brake wearCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect the following items:

Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Inspect drive beltsReplace dust and pollen filterReplace air cleaner elementReplace spark plugsInspect valve clearance

Replace automatic transmission fluidReplace VTM-4 rear differential fluidInspect idle speedReplace timing belt and inspect water pump

Replace engine coolant

Replace brake fluid Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

((OOrr eevveerryy 77 yyeeaarrss,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then

every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

((OOrr eevveerryy 11 yyeeaarr,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))

Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).miles x 1,000km x 1,000

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stopCheck inflation and condition once a month

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or every 1 year,whichever comes first

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

1524

3048

4572

75120

90144

105168

120192

150240

((OOrr eevveerryy 22 yyeeaarrss,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))

((OOtthheerrwwiissee aaddjjuusstt oonnllyy iiff nnooiissyy))

See information on maintenance and

emissions warranty, page .

At every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) up to

30,000 miles (48,000 km) or every 1 year,

then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2

years.

At 45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 3 years,

then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2

years.

6096

135216

1:

2:

:

162

1

2

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditi

ons

Page 169: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

# #

* *

# *

Follow the Severe MaintenanceSchedule if you drive your vehicleMAINLY under one or more of thefollowing conditions:

Driving in extremely hot [over 90°F(32°C)] conditions.

Extensive idling or long periods ofstop and go driving, such as a taxi ora commercial delivery vehicle.

Trailer towing, driving with a roofrack, or driving in mountainousconditions.

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions.

Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-icedroads.

Driving less than 5 miles (8 km) pertrip or, in freezing temperatures,driving less than 10 miles (16 km) pertrip.

Maintenance

Canadian Owners

165

7.512

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stopCheck inflation and condition once a month

Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or every 6 months,whichever comes first

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or every 6 months,whichever comes first

((OOrr eevveerryy 11 yyeeaarr,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))

((OOrr eevveerryy 22 yyeeaarrss,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) (Use normal schedule

except in dusty condition)

((OOtthheerrwwiissee aaddjjuusstt oonnllyy iiff nnooiissyy))

((OOrr eevveerryy 77 yyeeaarrss,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))

miles x 1,000km x 1,000

((OOrr eevveerryy 22 yyeeaarrss,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))

1524

3048

4572

6096

75120

90144

105168

120192

150240

Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).135216

Check engine oil and coolantCheck tiresReplace engine oil filter

Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 190 )Check front and rear brake wearInspect the following items:

Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft boots

Check parking brake adjustmentLubricate all hinges, locks and latchesInspect the following items:

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluids

Lights and controls/vehicle underbodyInspect drive beltsReplace dust and pollen filterReplace air cleaner element

Replace spark plugsInspect valve clearance

Replace automatic transmission fluid

Replace VTM-4 rear differential fluidInspect idle speedReplace timing belt and inspect waterpumpReplace engine coolant

Replace brake fluid Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

Exhaust system , Fuel lines and connections

1

2, 3

, 4

Main

tenance

Seve

refo

rS

eve

reC

onditio

ns

Page 170: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

**

*#

Maintenance166

See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.At every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) up to 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or every 6 months, then every 15,000 miles (24,000km) or 1 year.Follow this schedule for rear differential fluid replacement if you use your vehicle for off-highway driving, trailertowing, mainly in stop-and-go driving. Otherwise, use the fluid replacement schedule in the Maintenance Schedulefor Normal Conditions.See timing belt on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, page .

1:2:

3:

4:: 162

177

185

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

Page 171: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

(for Normal and Severe Schedules)Maintenance Record

Maintenance 167

3,750 mi

7,500 mi

11,250 mi

15,000 mi

18,750 mi

22,500 mi

26,250 mi

30,000 mi

33,750 mi

37,500 mi

41,250 mi

45,000 mi

48,750 mi

52,500 mi

56,250 mi

60,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severeconditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.

6,000 km

12,000 km

18,000 km

24,000 km

30,000 km

36,000 km

42,000 km

48,000 km

54,000 km

60,000 km

66,000 km

72,000 km

78,000 km

84,000 km

90,000 km

96,000 km

165164

Page 172: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

(for Normal and Severe Schedules)Maintenance Record

Maintenance168

93,750 mi

97,500 mi

101,250 mi

105,000 mi

108,750 mi

112,500 mi

116,250 mi

120,000 mi

63,750 mi

67,500 mi

71,250 mi

75,000 mi

78,750 mi

82,500 mi

86,250 mi

90,000 mi

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

150,000 km

156,000 km

162,000 km

168,000 km

174,000 km

180,000 km

186,000 km

192,000 km

102,000 km

108,000 km

114,000 km

120,000 km

126,000 km

132,000 km

138,000 km

144,000 km

Page 173: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

(for Normal and Severe Schedules)Maintenance Record

Maintenance 169

123,750 mi

127,500 mi

131,250 mi

135,000 mi

138,750 mi

142,500 mi

146,250 mi

150,000 mi

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Signature or dealer stamp198,000 km

204,000 km

210,000 km

216,000 km

222,000 km

228,000 km

234,000 km

240,000 km

Page 174: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Fluid Locations

Maintenance170

RADIATOR CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)POWER STEERING

FLUID (Red cap)

COOLANTRESERVOIR

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Page 175: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines’’.

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your Honda toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.Unscrew and remove the engine oil

fill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment. Install the engine oilfill cap and tighten it securely. Wait afew minutes and recheck the oil level.Do not fill above the upper mark; youcould damage the engine.

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

Maintenance 171

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Page 176: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Open the hood and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the recommendations inthe maintenance schedule. The oiland filter collect contaminants thatcan damage your engine if they arenot removed regularly.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Sealand it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals given on the maintenanceschedule.

Your Honda does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect your engine’s or transmission’sperformance and durability.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

1.

2.

Changing the Oil and FilterSynthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter

Maintenance172

DRAIN BOLTWASHER

Page 177: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:

Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourHonda dealer) is required.

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel on the dipstick. If necessary,add more oil.

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator light should go out within5 seconds. If it does not, turn offthe engine and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

3.

4.

Changing the Oil and Filter

Maintenance 173

NOTICE:

OIL FILTER

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

5.1 US qt (4.8 )

Improper disposal of engineoil can be harmf ul to the environment.If you change your own oil, pleasedispose of the used oil properly. Put itin a sealed container and take it to arecycling center. Do not discard it in atrash bin or dump it on the ground.

Page 178: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.Always use Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze orplain water.

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant

Maintenance174

RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Page 179: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

When the radiator and engine arecool, relieve any pressure in thecooling system by turning theradiator cap counterclockwise,without pressing down.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill. Cleanup any spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Put the radiator cap back on andtighten it.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

The low washerlevel indicator will light when thelevel is low.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition them.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

On Canadian models:

Windshield Washers

Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers

Maintenance 175

NOTICE:

RADIATOR CAP

Do not use engine antif reezeor a vinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

Page 180: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the tube tobring it to the upper mark.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Ifit’s not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality.Have the transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Maintenance

Automatic Transmission

176

DIPSTICK

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

Page 181: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

- -

To thoroughly flush thetransmission, the technicianshould drain and refill it withHonda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid), then drivethe vehicle for a short distance.Do this three times. Then drainand refill the transmission a finaltime.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your Honda dealer.

Put a new washer on the filler bolt,then reinstall the filler bolt andtighten it securely. Tighteningtorque:

The differential should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

The timing belt should be replacedat the intervals shown in themaintenance schedule. Replace thebelt at 60,000 miles (100,000 km) ifyou regularly drive your vehicle inone or more of these conditions:

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).

In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).

Frequently tow a trailer.

Check the fluid level with thedifferential at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground. Remove thedifferential fluid filler bolt andwasher, and carefully feel inside thebolt hole with your finger. The fluidlevel should be up to the edge of thebolt hole. If it is not, slowly addVTM-4 Differential Fluid until itstarts to run out of the hole.

6.

Maintenance

Timing Belt

Differential Oil

Automatic Transmission Fluid, Differential Oil, Timing Belt

177

FILLER BOLT

CORRECT LEVEL

33 lbf·ft (45 N·m , 4.6 kgf·m)

Page 182: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Check the brake fluid level in thereservoirs monthly.Replace it according to the timerecommendation in the maintenanceschedule.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Brake Fluid

Maintenance178

MAX

MIN

Page 183: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL mark.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

Maintenance

Power Steering Fluid

179

NOTICE:

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

Turning the steering wheel tof ull lef t or right lock and holding itthere can damage the power steeringpump.

Page 184: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk, readjustment may be required.Adjustments should be performed bya Honda dealer or other qualifiedmechanic.

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulb. Handle it by its steel base andprotect the glass from contact withyour skin or hard objects. If youtouch the glass, clean it withdenatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

NOTE: Halogen headlight bulbs getvery hot when lit. Oil, perspiration,or a scratch on the glass can causethe bulb to overheat and shatter.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pulling theconnector straight back.

Remove the rubber weather sealby pulling on the tab.

Unclip the end of the hold-downwire from its slot. Pivot it out ofthe way, and remove the bulb.

Insert the new bulb and make sureit is right side up. The tabs on thebase fit into the indentations in theheadlight assembly. Pivot the hold-down wire back in place, and clipthe end into the slot.

Reinstall the rubber seal and makesure one of its arrow is pointing up.

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Headlight Aiming

Replacing a Headlight Bulb

Lights

Maintenance180

CONNECTOR

BULB

Page 185: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

To remove the front turn signalbulb, push it in slightly and turn itcounterclockwise.

Install the new bulb into thesocket and reinstall it.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

1.

4.

5.

3.

2.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing a Front Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulb

181

Page 186: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Open the tailgate.

Remove the two screws, then pullthe rear light assembly straightback to remove it from the body.

Remove the socket of the burnedout bulb by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise, and pull itstraight out of its socket.

Place a cloth on the middle edgeof a part of the lens on thepassenger’s side. Remove a part ofthe lens by carefully prying on itsedge with a small flip tippedscrewdriver.

Install a new bulb into the socketand reinstall the socket into thelight assembly.

Use a Phillips-head screwdriver toremove the screw under the lens.

1.1.

2.

3.

2.

4.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing the High-mount BrakeLight

Replacing Rear Bulbs

182

SCREW

Page 187: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

If you are changing the bulb onthe driver’s side, start the engine,turn the steering wheel all the wayto the right, and turn off theengine. If you are changing thebulb on the passenger’s side, turnthe steering wheel to the left.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the five holding clips fromthe inner fender.

Pull the light assembly out of thetailgate.

Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push a new bulb into thesocket until it bottoms. Reinstallthe assembly.

1.

2.

4.

5.

3.

CONTINUED

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing a Front Side MarkerLight Bulb

183

HOLDING CLIP

Page 188: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the burned out bulb straightout of its socket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Put the inner fender in place.Install the five holding clips. Lockeach clip in place by pushing onthe center.3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Maintenance

Lights

184

Page 189: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

The driver’s floor mat that camewith your vehicle hooks over thefloor mat anchor. This keeps thefloor mat from sliding forward andpossibly interfering with the pedals.

If you remove the driver’s floor mat,make sure to re-anchor it when youput it back in your vehicle.

If you use a non-Honda floor mat,make sure it fits properly and that itcan be used with the floor matanchor. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mat.

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air dry beforeyou use the vehicle.Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

Maintenance

Floor Mats Cleaning Seat Belts

Floor Mats, Cleaning Seat Belts

185

LOOP

Page 190: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield. Raise the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, areas that aregetting hard, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

1. 2. Front only:

Wiper Blades

Maintenance186

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and wiper arms.

Page 191: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield. Lower thepassenger’s side first, then thedriver’s side.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metal rein-forcement along the back edge,remove the metal reinforcementstrips from the old wiper blade,and install them in the slots alongthe edge of the new blade.

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

Front only:

Wiper Blades

Maintenance 187

REINFORCEMENT

BLADE BLADE

Page 192: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold air pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional technical information,see page .

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure at least once a month. Eventires that are in good condition maylose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.

Remember to check the spare tire atthe same time.

220

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Tires

Tires Inflation

Maintenance188

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2kgf/cm )

P235/70R16 104S

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

Page 193: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Check the pressure in the tires whenthey are cold. This means the vehiclehas been parked for at least threehours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km).

Tire pressure for high speed drivingis the same as for normal driving.

If you check the pressure when thetires are hot (driven for severalmiles), you will see readings 4 to 6psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm )higher than the cold reading. This isnormal; do not release air to matchthe cold pressure.

Tubeless tires have some ability toself-seal if they are punctured. Youshould look closely for punctures if atire starts losing pressure.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either or these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

Tires

Maintenance

Tire Inspection

189

Page 194: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires every 7,500 miles (12,000km). Move the tires to the positionsshown in the chart each time theyare rotated. If you purchasedirectional tires, rotate only front-to-back.

Your vehicle’s tires have wear indica-tors molded into the tread. When thetread wears down to that point, youwill see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wideband running across the tread. Thisshows there is less than 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Atire that is this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see thetread wear indicator in three or moreplaces around the tire.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

Maintenance

Tires

Tire RotationTire Maintenance

190

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

(Front DirectionalTires and Wheels)

(Front Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

Front Front

Page 195: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Wheels:

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s side wall).Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS to work inconsistently.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

Tires:

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If you mount snow tires on yourHonda, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page

for tire size explanation.199

198

Wheel and Tire Specifications

Replacing Tires Winter Driving

Snow Tires

Maintenance

Tires

191

16 x 6 1/2 JJ

P235/70R16 104S

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

Page 196: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Because your Honda has limited tireclearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’cable-type traction devices, withrubber chain tensioners on the fronttires. Use traction devices only whenrequired by driving condition or locallaws. Make sure they are the correctsize for your tires. Metal link-type‘‘chains’’ should not be used.

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Tires

Tire Chains

Maintenance192

NOTICE: Traction devices that are thewrong size or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

Page 197: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your Honda dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfurther corrosion.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

Maintenance

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking Your Battery

193

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

Page 198: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc. arecompletely dry.

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than onemonth), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if

the vehicle is being storedindoors).

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

Disconnect the battery.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Park.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand tailgate seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand tailgate seals.

If possible, run the engineperiodically (preferably once amonth).

If you store your vehicle for 12months or longer, have your Hondadealer perform the inspections calledfor in the 24 months/30,000 milesmaintenance schedule (NormalConditions) as soon as you take itout of storage (see page ). Thereplacements called for in themaintenance schedule are notneeded unless the vehicle hasactually reached that time or mileage.

165

Maintenance

Vehicle Storage

194

Page 199: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

......................Compact Spare Tire . 196....................Changing a Flat Tire . 197

..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 201................................Jump Starting . 202

............If Your Engine Overheats . 204................Low Oil Pressure Light . 206

..........Charging System Indicator . 206..................Malfunction Indicator . 207

...............Brake System Indicator . 208......................Emergency Towing . 208

..............................................Fuses . 209..............................Fuse Locations . 212

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking Care of the Unexpected

195

Page 200: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replacedand put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces. Use greater caution whiledriving.

Do not mount snow chains on it.

Do not use the compact spare tireif you are towing a trailer.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Compact Spare Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected196

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Page 201: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park. Apply theparking brake.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0). Have all thepassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

The tools and jack are behind acover in the cargo area on thedriver’s side. Remove the cover bypushing the top of it.

Turn the jack’s endcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack and tools.

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area that isfar away from the traffic lanes.

2.

1. 3.

4.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected 197

JACK

SPARE TIRETOOLS COVER

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

Page 202: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

The spare tire is storedunderneath the rear cargo area.Remove the plastic cover on thecargo area lining to access theshaft for the spare tire hoist.

Put the wheel nut wrench on thehoist shaft. Turn the wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground. Keepturning the wheel wrench tocreate slack in the cable.

Remove the bracket from thespare tire.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. It is pointed to by amark molded into the underside ofthe body. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel wrench.

8.

7.

6.5. 9.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected198

SPARE TIRE WRENCH BRACKET JACKING POINT

Page 203: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Use the extension and wheelwrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Place the flattire on the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Lower the vehicle to the groundand remove the jack.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Remove the center cap from theflat tire, and place the flat tire upunder the hoist.

14.10.

11.

12.

13.

16.

15.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected 199

WHEEL WRENCH

EXTENSION

BRAKE HUB

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

Page 204: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Insert the hoist bracket into thecenter hole of the flat tire.

Slowly turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to take up the slack ofthe hoist cable. Make sure thebracket is seated in the centerhole of the spare tire.

Turn the wheel wrench clockwiseuntil the flat tire rests against theunderbody of the vehicle and youhear the hoist click.

Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jacks’ end bracket to lock it inplace and replace the tools andcover.

17.

18.

19.

20.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected200

NOTICE:

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

Always raise the spare tirehoist, even if you are not stowing a tire.If the hoist is lef t down, it will bedamaged during driving and need to bereplaced.

Page 205: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Diagnosing why your engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn thekey to START (III):

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch toSTART (III), you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.The transmission must be in Parkor Neutral or the starter will notoperate.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Turn on the headlights and checktheir brightness. If the headlightsare very dim or don’t light at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to START(III). If the headlights do not dim,check the condition of the fuses. Ifthe fuses are OK, there isprobably something wrong withthe electrical circuit for theignition switch or starter motor.You will need a qualifiedtechnician to determine theproblem (seeon page ).

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the vehiclefrom a booster battery (see page

).

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to START (III), butthe engine does not run.

202

208

193

202

137

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

Starting theEngine

The Starter Operates Normally

If the Engine Won’t Start

201

Page 206: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .You cannot start a Honda by pushingor pulling it.

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

Open the hood and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or like ice, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, climatecontrol, stereo system, lights, etc.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the dash panel to blinkrapidly (see page ).

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the warning light may notbe working.

1.

2.

3.

209

208

53

Taking Care of the Unexpected

EmergencyTowing

Jump Starting To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting

202

NOTICE:A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extremecold, the electrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

Page 207: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

-Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Start your vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,and then from the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Jump Starting

203

Page 208: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

The pointer of your vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).If your vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.Turn off all the accessories, andturn on the hazard indicator.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

5.

6.

4.

1.

2.

3.

208

If the Engine Overheats

EmergencyTowing

Taking Care of the Unexpected204

NOTICE:

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperaturegauge pointer at the red mark cancause serious damage to your engine.

Page 209: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Using gloves or large heavy cloth,turn the radiator capcounterclockwise without pushingdown to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum (climate control toFULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Addcoolant to the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck. If you donot have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

7.

8.

9.

11.

10.

208Emergency

Towing

If the Engine Overheats

Taking Care of the Unexpected 205

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Page 210: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure light. If it does not go outwithin ten seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving.(See on page

).

This light should nevercome on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible and you shouldtake immediate action.

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning lights.

If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, thebattery is not being charged.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

1.

2.

3.

4.

171

127

208

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Emergency Towing

Charging System Indicator

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Low Oil Pressure Light, Charging System Indicator

206

NOTICE: Running the engine with lowoil pressure can cause seriousmechanical damage almost immediately.Turn of f the engine as soon as you cansaf ely get the vehicle stopped.

Page 211: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

If the indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emission controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance,continued operation may causeserious damage.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the cause of this indicatorcoming on could be a loose ormissing fuel fill cap. Check the capor replace it. Tightening the cap willnot make the indicator turn offimmediately; it takes at least threedays of normal driving.

If the indicator remains on or thefuel cap was not loose or missing,have the vehicle checked by thedealer as soon as possible.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem in theautomatic transmission controlsystem.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If your vehicle battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It takes at leastthree days of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

To check if they are set, turn theignition to ON (II), without startingthe engine. The MalfunctionIndicator Lamp will come on for 20seconds. If it then goes off, thereadiness codes are set. If it blinks 5times, the readiness codes are notset. If possible, do not take yourvehicle for a state emissions testuntil the readiness codes are set.Refer to State Emissions Testing formore information (see page ).226

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Readiness Code

Malfunction Indicator

Taking Care of the Unexpected 207

NOTICE: If you keep driving with theMalf unction Indicator Lamp on, youcan damage your vehicle’s emissioncontrols and the engine. Those repairsmay not be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

Page 212: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

The operator will loadyour vehicle on the back of a truck.Any other method of towing willdamage the drive system. When youcontact the towing agency, informthem a flat-bed is required.

Refer toon page

for non-emergency towinginformation.

If the brake systemindicator comes on while

driving, the brake fluid level isprobably low in the reservoir. Presslightly on the brake pedal to see if itfeels normal. If it does, check thebrake fluid level the next time youstop at a service station (see page

). If the fluid level is low, takethe vehicle to your dealer and havethe brake system inspected for leaksor worn brake pads.

208

208

178

Brake System Indicator

EmergencyTowing

The only way you can safely towyour vehicle is with flat-bedequipment.

Towing Your VehicleBehind a Motorhome

Emergency Towing

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Brake System Indicator, Emergency Towing

208

NOTICE: Towing a Pilot with only twotires on the ground will damage partsof the 4WD system. It should betransported on a f lat-bed truck ortrailer.

Page 213: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

The vehicle’s fuses are located infour fuse boxes. The interior fuseboxes are located under thedashboard on the driver’s andpassenger’s side.

To open the passenger’s side, pullthe right edge of the cover.

The primary under-hood fuse box islocated on the passenger’s side. Thesecondary fuse box is next to thebattery.

Fuses

Taking Care of the Unexpected 209

UNDER-HOODFUSEBOXES

PASSENGER’ S SIDE INTERIORDRIVER’ S SIDE INTERIOR

Page 214: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that device. The diagram forthe interior driver’s side fuse box ison the kick panel below the fuse box.Check those fuses first, but check allthe fuses before deciding that ablown fuse is the cause. Replace anyblown fuses, and check if the deviceworks.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). Make sure the headlights andall other accessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Check each of the large fuses inthe primary under-hood fuse boxby looking through the top at thewise inside. Remove the screwswith a Phillips-head screwdriver.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse boxes bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller provided in the primaryunder-hood fuse box.

Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

1.

2.

3. 4.

5.

212 213

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Fuses

210

BLOWN

BLOWN

Page 215: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your vehicle.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified mechanic.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘COdE’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the Preset buttons toenter the five-digit code (see page

).

If a trailer light is burned out, checkif these fuses are blown when youreplace the light bulbs:

If those fuses are OK, but the trailerlights still do not work, there are twoblown 7.5 amp fuses in the trailerhatch wiring. To access the 7.5 ampfuses:

Open the tailgate and remove thecargo floor lid.Pull out the bottom of the tailgaterubber seal.Remove rear trim panel by pullingup on the inside edge of the reartrim panel, and unhooking the fourclips and tabs.After replacing fuses, and reinstallthe rear trim panel in the reverseorder of removal.

Primary under-hood fuse boxfuses 5, 7, and 24Interior driver’s side fuse box: 10Interior passenger’s side fuse box:10

6.

1021.

2.

3.

4.

On EX model

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Fuses

Trailer Fuses

211

NOTICE: Replacing a f use with onethat has a higher rating greatlyincreases the chances of damaging theelectrical system. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

Page 216: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

123456789

10111213

20 A30 A20 A15 A15 A

20 A20 A20 A40 A40 A30 A40 A

Spare FuseSpare FuseRight HeadlightACG SHazardNot usedStopLeft HeadlightRadioPower Window MotorPower SeatRear DefrosterBack Up, ACC

1234

40 A20 A20 A20 A

ABS MotorABS F/SRear ACC Socket4WD

1415161718192021222324

30 A40 A30 A

7.5 A10 A15 A

120 A30 A

7.5 A50 A20 A

Rear A/CHeater MotorCooling FanSpare FuseSpare FuseSpare FuseBatteryCondenser FanMG ClutchIGI MainTrailer (accessory)

Fuse Locations

Taking Care of the Unexpected212

PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

Page 217: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

--*

No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected

123

456789

10111213

15 A10 A

7.5 A

7.5 A7.5 A15 A

7.5 A7.5 A10 A

7.5 A15 A30 A

7.5 A

Fuel PumpSRSHeater Control, A/C ClutchRelay, Cooling Fan RelayPower Mirror, VTM-4Daytime Running LightECU (PCM), Cruise ControlOPDS, Rear WiperACC RelayBack-up Lights, InstrumentLightsTurn SignalsIG CoilFront WiperStarter Signal

1234567

8

910111213141516

20 A20 A20 A20 A

10 A20 A

20 A

15 A15 A10 A20 A

7.5 A

20 A

Driver’s Power WindowDriver’s Power Seat RecliningHeated SeatDriver’s Power Seat SlidingNot usedDaytime Running LightDriver’s side Rear PowerWindowFront Passenger’s PowerWindowFront Accessory Socket, RadioSmall LightInterior Light, NaviPower Door LockBack UpNot usedNot usedPassenger’s Side Rear PowerWindow

Canadian models:

On Canadian models

Fuse Locations

Taking Care of the Unexpected 213

Driver’s Side

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Passenger’s Side

FrontFront

:

Page 218: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

214

Page 219: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour Honda, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 216................................Specifications . 218

..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 220Uniform Tire Quality

..................................Grading . 220.................................Treadwear . 220

......................................Traction . 220.............................Temperature . 221

.......................Emissions Controls . 223.....................The Clean Air Act . 223

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 223

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 223

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 223

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 224....................PGM-FI System . 224

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 224

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 224

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 224

....................Replacement Parts . 224..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 225

..............State Emissions Testing . 226....Testing of Readiness Codes . 226

Technical Information

Technical Information 215

Page 220: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourHonda dealer uses to register yourvehicle for warranty purposes. It isalso necessary for licensing andinsuring your vehicle. The easiestplace to find the VIN is on a platefastened to the top of the dashboard.You can see it by looking throughthe windshield on the driver’s side. Itis also on the Certification label at-tached to the driver’s doorjamb, andis stamped on the engine com-partment bulkhead. The VIN is alsoprovided in bar code on theCertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

Technical Information216

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

Page 221: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

The Engine Number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

The Transmission Number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

Identif ication Numbers

Technical Information 217

ENGINE NUMBER

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

Page 222: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

- - *

Specifications

Technical Information218

Dimensions

Weights

Air Conditionig

Capacities

1.74 US gal (6.6 )2.25 US gal (8.5 )

5.1 US qt (4.8 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

5.8 US qt (5.5 )3.2 US qt (3.0 )8.2 US qt (7.8 )

0.16 US gal (0.6 )

19.3 US gal (73 )

2.79 US qt (2.64 )

188.0 in (4,775 mm)76.3 in (1,938 mm)70.6 in (1,793 mm)

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

66.3 in (1,685 mm)66.5 in (1,690 mm)

9,700 lbs (4,400 kg)

HFC-134a (R-134a)24.7 26.5 oz (700 750 g)

ND-OIL8

106.3 in (2,700 mm)

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity:

The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305meters) of elevation.

Equipped with transmission fluid cooler and power steeringfluid cooler.

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

See the tire information label atta-ched to the driver’s doorjamb.

Gross vehicle weight rating

Gross combined weightrating (GCWR)

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

Fuel tank

EnginecoolantEngine oil

AutomatictransmissionfluidReardifferentialfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

Approx.

FrontRear

1 :

2 :

ChangeTotalChange

IncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotal

Change1 :

2 :

2

1

2

1

Page 223: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

--

---

------------

Specifications

Technical Information 219

Lights

Battery

Fuses

Engine

Alignment

Tires

60 W/55 W12 V

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

T155/90D16 110MP235/70R16 104S

1°88’0°50’0°50’

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.00 in (0.0 mm)

10.0 : 1211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm )

3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

12 V12 V

12 V

5 W27 W/8 W

5 W21 W/5 W21 W/5 W21 CP (18 W)5 W18 W6.2 W5 W1.1 W3.8 W

12 V 65 AH/20 HR

14 V12 V 12.4 W

1.4 W

HeadlightsFront side marker lightsFront turn signal lights/Parking lightsRear side marker lightsRear turn signal/hazard lightsStop/TaillightsBackup lightsLicense plate lightsHigh-mount brake lightIndividual map lightsTailgate lightVanity mirror lightDoor (Courtesy) lightGrabrail lightsConsole lights

Capacity

Interior

Under-hood

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC,V6 gasoline engine

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

Size

Pressure

See page 213 or the fuse labelattached to the dashboard.See page 213 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door under the dashboard.See page 212 or the fuse boxcover.

PZFR5F-11PKJ16CR-L11

Front/RearSpareFront/RearSpare

FrontRearFrontRearFront

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side(1157 NA)

(168)(7443)(7443)(921)(168)(921)(204)

(HB2)(168)

FrontRearFrontRearFront

NGK:DENSO:

Page 224: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

-The tires on your car meet all U.S.Federal Safety Requirements. Alltires are also graded for treadwear,traction, and temperature perform-ance according to Department ofTransportation (DOT) standards.The following explains thesegradings.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

All passenger vehicle tires mustconform to Federal SafetyRequirements in addition to thesegrades.

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Technical Information

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

220

Page 225: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

- -

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance, which all passengervehicle tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory testwheel than the minimum required bylaw.

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possible tirefailure.

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampleof tire size with an explanation ofwhat each component means.

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Rim diameter in inches.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire width in millimeters.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

P

225

55

16

94

V

R

Temperature A, B, C

Tire Labeling

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles), Tire Labeling

Technical Information

Tire Size

221

P225/55R16 94V

Page 226: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Tire Identification Number (TIN) isa group of numbers and letters thatlook like the following example TIN.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

Tire type code.

Date of manufacture.

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202

Tire Identif ication Number

Tire Labeling

Technical Information222

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

Page 227: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a PositiveCrankcase Ventilation System. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The Positive Crank-

case Ventilation valve routes themfrom the crankcase back to theintake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page

.164

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

The Clean Air Act

Emissions Controls

Taking Care of the Unexpected 223

Page 228: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,Ignition Timing Control, ExhaustGas Recirculation and Three WayCatalytic Converter. These foursystems work together to control theengine’s combustion and minimizethe amount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI System uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: Air Intake,Engine Control, and Fuel Control.The Powertrain Control Module(PCM) uses various sensors todetermine how much air is goinginto the engine. It then controls howmuch fuel to inject under alloperating conditions.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.The three way catalytic converter is

in the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), dinitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The Exhaust Gas Recirculation(EGR) system takes some of theexhaust gas and routes it back intothe intake manifold. Adding exhaustgas to the air/fuel mixture reducesthe amount of NOx produced whenthe fuel is burned.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System Three Way Catalytic Converter

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Emissions Controls

Technical Information224

Page 229: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire any com-bustible materials that come near it.Park your vehicle away from highgrass, dry leaves, or other flamma-bles.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Technical Information 225

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

Page 230: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle re-tested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for re-testingby doing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 8hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 20° and95°F.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park. Increasethe engine speed to 2,000 rpm andhold it there until the temperaturegauge rises to at least 1/4 of thescale (approximately 3 minutes).

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD. Do not use the cruise control.When traffic allows, drive for 90seconds without moving theaccelerator pedal. (Vehicle speedmay vary slightly; this is okay.) Ifyou cannot do this for acontinuous 90 seconds because oftraffic conditions, drive for at least30 seconds, then repeat it twomore times (for a total of 90seconds).

Testing of Readiness Codes

State Emissions Testing

Technical Information226

Page 231: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determinesthe readiness codes are still notset, see your Honda dealer.

State Emissions Testing

Technical Information 227

Page 232: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

228

Page 233: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Customer Service................................Information . 230

....................Warranty Coverages . 231Reporting Safety Defects

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 232.....................Authorized Manuals . 233

Warranty and Customer Relations

Technical Information 229

Page 234: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

U.S. Owners:Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. TheService Manager or GeneralManager can help. Almost allproblems are solved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Service Office.

Canadian Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicleDate of purchaseMileage on your vehicleYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

216

Technical Information

Customer Service Information

230

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816

San Juan, Puerto Rico 00919-0816

(787) 250-4318

American Honda Motor Co.Honda Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7D1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Page 235: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Your new Honda is covered by thesewarranties:

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’s emis-sions control systems. Time, mileage,and coverage are conditional. Pleaseread the warranty manual for exactinformation.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Honda Accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty manual fordetails.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from a Honda dealer.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2004 Honda Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your Honda’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warranty infor-mation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2004 WarrantyManual that came with your vehicle.

covers all genuineHonda replacement parts againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Technical Information

Warranty Coverages

231

Page 236: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inWashington D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

Technical Information232

Page 237: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

*2004

HON

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order in any of three ways:

Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this pageCall Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356

(credit card orders only)

Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners shouldcontact their authorized Honda dealer.

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals(U.S.only)

Authorized Manuals

233

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Form Description

2004 Honda Pilot

Service Manual

2004 Honda Pilot

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2004 Honda Pilot

Body Repair Manual

2004 Honda Pilot

Owner’s Manual

2004 Honda Pilot

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

2004 Honda Pilot

Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Publication

Form Number

61S9V01

61S9V01EL

61S9V30

31S9V610

31S9V710

31S9VQ10

HON-R

Price

Each

$70.00

$50.00

$44.00

$34.00

$29.00

$12.00

FREE

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.00

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurringobligation.

www. helminc. com

Page 238: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

SHIP

TO

PAYMENT

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

This manual complements the Service Manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

Body Repair Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Service Manual:

Authorized Manuals

234

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

Page 239: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

CONTINUED

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 48, 206............................Jump Starting . 202

..............................Maintenance . 193............................Specifications . 219

..............................Before Driving . 123....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 16

...........................Beverage Holders . 77..................................Booster Seats . 39

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 145

.............Break-in, New Linings . 124...........................................Fluid . 178

....................Bulb Replacement . 182.........................................Parking . 75

.................System Indicator . 49, 208........................Wear Indicators . 145

.............................Braking System . 144.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 124

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 59........................Brights, Headlights . 58

Bulb Replacement..............................Brake Lights . 182

................Front Parking Lights . 181........Front Side Marker Lights . 183

.................................Headlights . 180........High-mount Brake Lights . 182

.................................Rear Bulbs . 182............................Specifications . 219

.............Turn Signal Light . 181, 182..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 180

...Accessories and Modifications . 129ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 64..............Accessory Power Sockets . 77

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 172...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 19

.....Airbags, Additional Infomation . 19...Additional Safety Precautions . 24

.............................Airbag Service . 24How the Side Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 23..How the SRS Indicator Works . 23

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 20

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 22........................SRS Components . 19

................Air Conditioning System . 82.......................Rear A/C Control . 87

.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 188......................................Antifreeze . 174

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)....................Indicator Light . 49, 146

...................................Operation . 145..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 102

.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 64..................................Audio System . 88

...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 18

...Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 58.............Automatic Speed Control . 116..............Automatic Transmission . 138

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 218...............Checking Fluid Level . 176

.......................................Shifting . 138.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 138

................Shift Lever Positions . 139....................Shift Lock Release . 141

Index

A

B

I

Page 240: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

................................Cancel Button . 117............................Capacities Chart . 218

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 42........................Cargo, . 131

Cassette Player..............................................Care . 95

.....................................Operation . 98..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii

...........................................CD Care . 95.....................................CD Changer . 94

.........CD Changer Error Message . 97.........................................CD Player . 93

.............CD Player Error Message . 96........................Certification Label . 216

...................................Chains, . 192....................Changing a Flat Tire . 197

Change Oil........................................How to . 172

.............................When to . 164, 165...Charging System Indicator . 48, 206

............Checklist, Before Driving . 136..................Childproof Door Locks . 65

.....................................Child Safety . 25..............................Booster Seats . 39

...................................Child Seats . 30.....Important Safety Reminders . 25

..........................................Infants . 29..........................Larger Children . 38

.........................................LATCH . 33......................Risks with Airbags . 26

.............................Small Children . 30.........................................Tethers . 37

.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 26Child Seats

.........................................LATCH . 33...........................Lower Anchors . 33

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 37.................Climate Control System . 86

.........................Clock, Setting the . 103..............................................Clock . 103

.....................Code, Audio System . 102........................CO in the Exhaust . 223

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 137.......................Compact Spare . 196

...................Console Compartment . 77...............Consumer Information . 230

.............Controls, Instruments and . 45Coolant

........................................Adding . 174....................................Checking . 127

.........................Proper Solution . 174...................Temperature Gauge . 55

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 223

................Cruise Control Indicator . 51............Cruise Control Operation . 116

.....................................Cup Holders . 77....Customer Service Information . 230

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 2, 46

................Daytime Running Lights . 59Daytime Running Lights

.......................................Indicator . 51.................................Dead Battery . 202

............Defects, Reporting Safety . 232................Defogger, Rear Window . 60..........Defrosting the Windows . 83, 85

....................................Dimensions . 218...............Dimming the Headlights . 58

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 176

..................................Engine Oil . 127..........................Directional Signals . 58

how to carry

tires

tire

Index

C

D

II

Page 241: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

.....................................Fan, Interior . 82Features, Comfort and

................................Convenience . 81....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 125

Filters...............................................Oil . 172

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 59...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 197

Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 176

..........................................Brake . 178..........................Power Steering . 179

..................Windshield Washer . 175FM Stereo Radio

.....................................Reception . 91...................Folding the Third Seat . 71

..........................Four-way Flashers . 59............................Front Airbags . 10, 19

Front Seat................................Adjusting . 68, 69

.........................................Heaters . 67

.....................................Airbags . 9, 19

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 145.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 173

Doors..............Locking and Unlocking . 65

....................Lockout Prevention . 65......................Power Door Locks . 65

..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 220...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...........................................Driving . 135....................................Economy . 128...................................DVD Player . 104

........DVD Player Error Message . 112

..............................Economy, Fuel . 128Emergencies

............................Jump Starting . 202.......................................Towing . 208

..............Hazard Warning . 59

............Emergencies on the Road . 195.............Battery, Jump Starting . 202...........Brake System Indicator . 208

................Changing a Flat Tire . 197.....Charging System Indicator . 206

..................Checking the Fuses . 210

.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 206...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 207

..................Overheated Engine . 204...........................Emergency Brake . 75

......................Emergency Flashers . 59......................Emergency Towing . 208.......................Emissions Controls . 223

.............Emissions Testing, State . 226Engine

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 55.............................. 137

Malfunction Indicator................................Lamp . 48, 207

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 48, 206

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 171...............................Overheating . 204

............................Specifications . 219

............................Speed Limiter . 140.......................................Starting . 137

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 223...............................Exhaust Fumes . 42

Exhaust Gas Recirculation........................................System . 224

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 15

CONTINUED

Button

If it won’t start

Index

E

F

III

Page 242: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

.................................................Fuel . 124......................Fill Door and Cap . 125

...........................................Gauge . 54................Octane Requirement . 124

........................Reserve Indicator . 51........................Tank, Filling the . 125

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 210

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 128.........................................Gasoline . 124

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 51...........................................Gauge . 54

................Octane Requirement . 124........................Tank, Filling the . 125

................Gas Station Procedures . 125Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 55...............................................Fuel . 54

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight.......................................Rating) . 148

GCWR (Gross Combined Weight.......................................Rating) . 148

............Gearshift Lever Positions . 139........................................Glove Box . 78

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight.......................................Rating) . 148

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 180.................Hazard Warning Button . 59

........................................Headlights . 58........................................Aiming . 180

..............Automatic Lighting Off . 58............Daytime Running Lights . 59

..................High Beam Indicator . 51...........High Beams, Turning on . 58............Low Beams, Turning on . 58

.........................Reminder Chime . 58........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 180

...................................Turning on . 58...................................Headphones . 113

..............................Head Restraints . 72.................................Heated Mirror . 74

.....................................Heater, Seat . 67.......................Heating and Cooling . 82

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 137.................High-Low Beam Switch . 58..............High-mount Brake Light . 182

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 118

.......................Hood, Opening the . 126..................................................Horn . 56

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 216Ignition

..............................................Keys . 62...........................................Switch . 64

............Timing Control System . 224........................Immobilizer System . 62

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6Indicators

.......................A/T Temperature . 52...............ABS (Anti-lock Brake) . 49

Brake (Parking and Brake....................................System) . 49

.................................Brake Lamp . 50........................Charging System . 48

.............................Cruise Control . 51DRL (Daytime Running

......................................Lights) . 51...................................High Beam . 51

........Key (Immobilizer System) . 49

Index

G

H

I

IV

Page 243: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

..................................................Keys . 62

......................................Low Fuel . 51........................Low Oil Pressure . 48

...........................Side Airbag Off . 48...............................................SRS . 48

Turn Signal and Hazard...................................Warning . 50

..........................................VTM-4 . 52..............................Washer Level . 51

.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 47.........................Infant Restraint . 26, 29

................................Infant Seats . 26, 29...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 188

...................................Inside Mirror . 74.............................Inspection, Tire . 189

........................Instrument Panel . 2, 46........Instrument Panel Brightness . 59

........................................Introduction . i

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 198.......................................Jack, Tire . 197

................................Jump Starting . 202

.......................Label, Certification . 216.................Lane Change, Signaling . 58

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 12, 17...........LATCH Anchorage System . 33

.................................................Light . 79.............................................Lights . 180

....................Bulb Replacement . 180.......................................Indicator . 47

.........................................Parking . 58..................................Turn Signal . 58

....................................Load Limits . 132......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 64

Locks.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 64

............................Fuel Fill Door . 125....................................Glove Box . 78

....................Lockout Prevention . 65.................................Power Door . 65

........................Low Coolant Level . 127.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 51

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 48, 206.................................Lower Anchor . 33

...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 218..............Luggage, . 131

...................Neutral Gear Position . 139..................New Vehicle Break-in . 124

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 216

..................................Maintenance . 159Owner’s Maintenance

...................................Checks . 163.................................Record . 167-169

......................Required Indicator . 53..........................................Safety . 160

.............................Schedule . 164-166.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 48, 207

..............Manual Seat Adjustments . 69...............................Meters, Gauges . 54

.................................Modifications . 130

CONTINUED

Storing (Cargo)

Index

J

K

LM

N

V

Page 244: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 124.........................................Odometer . 54

...............................Odometer, Trip . 54....................Off-Highway Driving . 155...................Off-Road Precautions . 155

Oil........................Change, How to . 172..............Change, When to . 164, 165......................Checking Engine . 127..............Pressure Indicator . 48, 206

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 171

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 64

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 223

..............................Outside Mirrors . 74....................Overheating, Engine . 204

....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 163

...................Radiator Overheating . 204Radio/CD Sound

..........................................System . 88..........................Readiness Codes . 226

.................................Rear A/C Unit . 87............Rear Audio Control Panel . 107

........Rear Entertainment System . 104..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 182

............................Rear View Mirror . 74.................Rear Window Defogger . 60

.Rear Window Wiper and Washer . 57.........Reclining the Seat Backs . 68, 69

...........Reclining the Second Seats . 70................Reclining the Third Seat . 71

.............................Reminder Lights . 47................Remote Audio Controls . 101.................Remote Control (RES) . 109

.......................Remote Transmitter . 66Replacement Information

..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 185................Engine Oil and Filter . 172

.................................Floor Mats . 185..........................................Fuses . 210

................................Light Bulbs . 180..............Panel Brightness Control . 59

........................Park Gear Position . 139

...........................................Parking . 143.................................Parking Brake . 75

Parking Brake and Brake System...............................Indicator . 49, 208

.................................Parking Lights . 58..Parking Over Things that Burn . 225

............................Playing the Radio . 88....................................Playing a CD . 93

....................Playing a CD Changer . 94.................................Playing a Tape . 98.............................PGM-FI System . 224

..........................Power Door Locks . 65................Power Seat Adjustments . 68.................Power Socket Locations . 76

..............................Power Windows . 73.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 15.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 10

...Additional Safety Precautions . 16.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 15

........................Protecting Children . 25.....................General Guidelines . 25

...........................Protecting Infants . 29...........Protecting Larger Children . 38

.............Protecting Small Children . 30

Index

O

P

R

VI

Page 245: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

.............................Schedule . 164-166...................................Seat Belts . 184

................................Timing Belt . 177...........................................Tires . 191

.............................Wiper Blades . 186Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 19...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 127

...............................Restraint, Child . 25..................Reverse Gear Position . 139

......................................Roof Rack . 131................................Rotation, Tire . 190

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 16.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 232

.................................Safety Features . 7...........................................Airbags . 9

.......................................Seat Belts . 8.............Safety Labels, Location of . 43

...............................Safety Messages . ii.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 16

...............Additional Information . 16Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 18

.....................................Cleaning . 185......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17

................................Maintenance . 18Reminder Light and

................................Beeper . 16, 48...................System Components . 16

...............Use During Pregnancy . 15...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 12

....................................Seat Heaters . 67.................................................Seats . 68

............Folding the Second Seat . 70...............Folding the Third Seat . 71

..........................Head Restraints . 72.........Reclining the Second Seat . 70

............Reclining the Third Seat . 71.......................Third Seat Access . 70

............Seats, Adjusting the . 10, 68, 69............................Security System . 115

...............................Serial Number . 216...........................Service Intervals . 161...........................Service Manual . 233

.........Service Station Procedures . 125..........................Setting the Clock . 103

Shifting the Automatic.............................Transmission . 138

.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 138

........................Shift Lock Release . 141Side Marker Lights, Bulb

.........................Replacement in . 183................................Side Airbags . 9, 22

....................Cutoff Indicator . 23, 48...............................Signaling Turns . 58

.....................................Snow Tires . 191..................................Sound System . 88

Spare Tire......................................Inflating . 196

............................Specifications . 219....................Specifications Charts . 218

................................Speed Control . 116..........SRS, Additional Information . 19

...Additional Safety Precautions . 24.............................Airbag Service . 24

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 23

..How the SRS Indicator Works . 23How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 20...How Your Side Airbags Work . 22

........................SRS Components . 19.............................SRS Indicator . 23, 48

CONTINUED

Index

S

VII

Page 246: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

....START (Ignition Key Position) . 64.......................Starting the Engine . 137

In Cold Weather at High..................................Altitude . 137

................With a Dead Battery . 202..............State Emissions Testing . 226

........Steam Coming from Engine . 204Steering Wheel

..................................Adjustment . 61.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 64

...............................Buttons . 101, 116.....................Stereo Sound System . 88

....................Storing Your Vehicle . 194..........................Sunglasses Holder . 78

..........................................Sun Visor . 79Supplemental Restraint System

......................................Servicing . 24.........................SRS Indicator . 23, 48

...................System Components . 19..................................Synthetic Oil . 172

......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 182.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 195

......................................Tape Player . 98

Technical Descriptions......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 220.....Emissions Control Systems . 223

..........State Emissions Testing . 226Three Way Catalytic

...............................Converter . 225.......................Temperature Gauge . 55

..........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 87....................Temperature, Outside . 55...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 18

........Testing of Readiness Codes . 226..............Tether Anchorage Points . 37

............................Theft Protection . 102..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 225

..........................Time, Setting the . 103..................Tilt the Steering Wheel . 61

....................................Timing Belt . 177

....................................Tire Chains . 192.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 197

...............................................Tires . 188..............................Air Pressure . 188

...................................Balancing . 190.........................Checking Wear . 189..........................Compact Spare . 196

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 220......................................Inflation . 188

..................................Inspection . 189..............................Maintenance . 190

...................................Replacing . 191......................................Rotating . 190

...........................................Snow . 191............................Specifications . 219

................................Tire Chains . 192..........................Winter Driving . 191

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 197Towing

.....................................A Trailer . 147................Emergency Wrecker . 208

....Equipment and Accessories . 151.......................Traction Devices . 192

Your Vehicle Behind a............................Motorhome . 154.............................Weight Limit . 150.............................Trailer Loading . 147

......................Trailer Towing Tips . 152Transmission

...............Checking Fluid Level . 176...........................Fluid Selection . 176

..............Identification Number . 216.............Shifting the Automatic . 138

.....................................Treadwear . 220

.......................................Trip Meter . 54

Index

T

VIII

Page 247: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

....................................Turn Signals . 58

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 43

..................Warranty Coverages . 231

Washer, Windshield........Checking the Fluid Level . 175

............................Level Indicator . 51.....................................Operation . 57

Wheels...............Adjusting the Steering . 61............Alignment and Balance . 190

..........................Compact Spare . 196......................................Wrench . 199

Windows..................Operating the Power . 73

...........................Rear, Defogger . 60Windshield

...............................Defroster . 83, 85.......................................Washers . 57

Wipers, Windshield.......................Changing Blades . 186

.....................................Operation . 57Rear Window Wiper and

.....................................Washer . 57....................................Worn Tires . 189

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 208

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 195

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 220........................Unleaded Gasoline . 124

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 173

.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 132......................Vehicle Dimensions . 218

....Vehicle Identification Number . 216.............................Vehicle Storage . 194

.................................................VIN . 216..................................Viscosity, Oil . 171..................................VTM-4 Lock . 142

: U.S. and Canada only

Index

U

V

W

IX

Page 248: 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A9V0404OM/enu/PI0404OM.pdf · 2004 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Rear Differential Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

5.1 US qt (4.8 )

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Compact Spare Tire:

Front/Rear:Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 86 or higher.

API Service SJ ‘‘EnergyConserving’’ oil, SAE 5W-20viscosity (see page ).

Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid(see page ).

171

176

179

177

178

19.3 US gal (73 )